Contents

Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 614
1 of 614

Summary of Content for Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Acura TL was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

TM

10/07/29 11:39:15 31TK4620_002

2011 TL

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system component.

ii

10/07/29 11:39:20 31TK4620_003

2011 TL

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

on the vehicle. preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or . These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety. how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Safety Labels Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section Instructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.

10/07/29 11:39:30 31TK4620_004

2011 TL

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

( )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

Service Information Summary

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.......Instruments and Controls . 61

..............Features . 215

.......................................................................Before Driving . 443

.........................................................................................Driving . 459

.................................................Maintenance . 495

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 547

..............................................Technical Information . 577

.......................Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 595

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 599

1

10/07/29 11:39:41 31TK4620_006

Owner's Identification Form

00X31-TK4-6200 2010 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved

2011 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual

2011 TL

A convenient reference to the sections in this manual.

A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicles seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information.

How to order manuals and other technical literature.

A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, the multi-information display, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column.

This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them.

The Maintenance Minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service. There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them.

The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park.

What gasoline to use, how to break- in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Technical Information

Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Features

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Driving

Before Driving

Overview of Contents

2

TM

10/07/29 11:39:57 31TK4620_007

2011 TL

: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance Y

our V

ehicle ata

G lance

3

DRIVERS FRONT AIRBAG

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS GAUGES MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MOONROOF SWITCH(P. 63) (P. 75)

(P. 77)

(P. 9, 26)

(P. 162)

(P. 148)

(P. 9, 26)

(P. 139)

(P. 198)

(P. 447)

(P. 202) HOMELINK BUTTONS

A/T model with navigation system is shown.

PASSENGERS FRONT AIRBAG

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET (P. 207)

(P. 225)

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P. 216)

CLOCK AUDIO

(P. 386)

(P. 374) COMPASS (P. 379)

(P. 146)

(P. 164)

(P. 445)

USB ADAPTER CABLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P. 465)

(P. 468) (P. 372)

(P. 254, 263, 340, 350) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET (P. 207)

10/07/29 11:40:06 31TK4620_008

2011 TL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Refer to the navigation system owners manual. If equipped

1 : 2 : 3 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

CENTER DISPLAY

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

HORN

NAVIGATION DISPLAY HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P. 133, 137)

(P. 131)

(P. 34)

(P. 139)

(P. 178)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHT WASHERS (P. 132)

(P. 139/163) INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS (P. 137)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

PADDLE SHIFTERS

(P. 370)

(P. 485)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P. 140)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 196)

SELECTOR KNOB (P. 226) INTERFACE DIAL (P. 273) (P. 406)

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM

(P. 191)

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT

ENGINE START/ STOP BUTTON

(P. 217, 274)(P. 473)

: Models with keyless access system

IGNITION SWITCH (P. 145)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS (P. 78)A/T model with navigation system is shown.

(P. 389)

(P. 383)

1

3

2

2

2

3

3

10/07/29 11:40:16 31TK4620_009

2011 TL

This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 .......Your Vehicles Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8 ...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11 .....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13 ............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15 5. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 16 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About .......................Your Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20 ......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt ...............................Tensioners . 22

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23 Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 24 ......Airbag System Components . 24

How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 33

How the Passenger Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 34

.............................Airbag Service . 35 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

Protecting Children General ................................Guidelines . 37

All Children Must Be ...............................Restrained . 37

All Children Should Sit in a .................................Back Seat . 38

The Passengers Front Airbag .........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several ...................................Children . 40

If a Child Requires Close ..................................Attention . 40

...Additional Safety Precautions . 40 Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 42 .......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 43 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47 .........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51 ...........Protecting Larger Children . 53

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53 ..................Using a Booster Seat . 54

When Can a Larger Child Sit in .........................................Front . 55

...Additional Safety Precautions . 56 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

...................................Safety Labels . 58

Driver and Passenger Safety D

river and

P assenger

Safety

5

10/07/29 11:40:20 31TK4620_010

2011 TL

Youll find many safety dations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recom- mendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

Engaging in mobile phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles and

pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert attention away from driving.

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.16

37 56 497

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Dont Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to the Task of Driving Safely

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition

Control Your Speed

6

10/07/29 11:40:31 31TK4620_011

recommen-

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.

The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

However, you and your passengers cant take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in the correct position and

. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

always wear your seat belts

D river

and P

assenger Safety

7

(11)

(10)

(1)

(12) (3)

(7)

(5)

(8) (9)(6) (9) (4)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(2) (2)

(1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners (12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensors

10/07/29 11:40:38 31TK4620_012

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicles built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.

Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts side impacts rear impacts rollovers

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

10/07/29 11:40:49 31TK4620_013

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page

for more information on how your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page for more information on how your side

In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact (see page

for more information on how your side curtain airbags work).26

30

32

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

9

10/07/29 11:40:56 31TK4620_014

airbags work).

2011 TL

The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplement the seat belts.

To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safety system can prevent all injures or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rear collisions, or minor frontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

10/07/29 11:41:03 31TK4620_015

2011 TL

The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front seat.

See pages for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.

Your vehicle has a door/ trunk open indicator (red)

on the instrument panel to indicate when any door or the trunk lid is not tightly closed.

Your vehicle also has a door and trunk open indicator on the multi- information display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator(s) for each condition.

See page for how to lock the doors, and page for how the door/ trunk open indicator works.

You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and each time you open any door or the trunk with the key in the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked.

37 56

146

:

17871 181

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Close and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 1.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

11

10/07/29 11:41:12 31TK4620_016

2011 TL

When one or more doors or the trunk lid are not tightly closed, the corresponding indicator for each condition will come on.

The above example shows the front right and rear left doors, and the trunk open.

When the trunk is not tightly closed, the TRUNK OPEN indicator will come on.

If any door or the trunk is not closed tightly, the multi-information display reminds you to close the open door(s) or the trunk before you start driving.

The above illustration shows that all doors and the trunk are open.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

10/07/29 11:41:18 31TK4620_017

2011 TL

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.

Adjust the drivers seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to

Your vehicle has the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page .

140

121

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front Seats2.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

13

10/07/29 11:41:25 31TK4620_018

a stop.

2011 TL

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.

See page for how to adjust the front seats.

155

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.

10/07/29 11:41:31 31TK4620_019

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust the seat-backs.

Adjust the drivers head restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.

Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.

155

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

15

Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

10/07/29 11:41:38 31TK4620_020

2011 TL

Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the head restraints and how the drivers and front passengers active head restraints work.

Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

157

Fasten and Position the Seat

5.

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

10/07/29 11:41:44 31TK4620_021

Belts

2011 TL

If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.

See page for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.

If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).

Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

20

Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

17

RELEASE BUTTON

Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

10/07/29 11:41:50 31TK4620_022

2011 TL

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper6.

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

10/07/29 11:41:57 31TK4620_023

Sitting Position

2011 TL

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if its okay for you to drive.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your airbags inflate.

This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.

Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper

operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the same seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Do not put any accessories on seat belts.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting your dealer.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

19

10/07/29 11:42:05 31TK4620_024

2011 TL

Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners.

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound.You will also see a FASTEN SEAT

BELT message on the multi- information display.

This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display.

:

178 181

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

10/07/29 11:42:13 31TK4620_025

2011 TL

If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the drivers seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page for how to properly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

16

49

CONTINUED

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

21

10/07/29 11:42:22 31TK4620_026

2011 TL

To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.

For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position.

The tensioners can be activated during a collision in which the front airbags . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.

If the tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator comes on and the tensioner must be replaced.

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

10/07/29 11:42:28 31TK4620_027

2011 TL

For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by your dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your

booklet for details.

530

Acura Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

23

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

10/07/29 11:42:34 31TK4620_028

2011 TL

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

(1)

(3) (8)

(4)

(5) (15)

(2) (11)

(14)

(13)

(14) (16)(13)

(4)

(10)

(5)

(8)

(6)

(9) (7) (12)

(1) Drivers Front Airbag (2) Passengers Front Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (5) Side Airbags

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (16) Safing Sensor

(6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passengers Weight Sensors (8) Front Impact Sensors (9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (10) Side Impact Sensors (First) (11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors (12) Front Passengers Weight Sensors Control Unit/

ODS Sensors Control Unit (13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (14) Side Curtain Airbags

10/07/29 11:42:40 31TK4620_029

2011 TL

Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.

Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passengers side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page ).

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG (see

).

Sensors that can detect whether the drivers seat belt and the front passengers seat belt are latched or unlatched (see page ).

A drivers seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see

).

Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passengers seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passengers front airbag will be turned off (see page ).

26

30

22

20

31

29

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

25

10/07/29 11:42:49 31TK4620_030

page 32

page 29

2011 TL

If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicles rapid deceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the drivers and front passengers airbags, at the time and with the force needed.

A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system components (see page ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been turned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in case your vehicles electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

:

178 181

33

34

32

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

26

10/07/29 11:42:58 31TK4620_031

2011 TL

CONTINUED

After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbags surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbags immediately deflate, so they wont interfere with the drivers visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Only the drivers airbag can deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passengers airbag off (see page ).34

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

27

10/07/29 11:43:05 31TK4620_032

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with dual- stage, multiple-threshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/or other factors. Front airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Objects placed or pushed under the front passengers seat may cause the sensor to malfunction, increasing the risk of injury in a crash.

Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children or small-statured adults who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work properly:

Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any cargo or metal objects under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS)

Advanced Airbags

28

10/07/29 11:43:11 31TK4620_033

2011 TL

The passengers advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passengers front airbag off.

Be aware that objects placed on the passengers seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag gets turned off by the weight sensors, a passenger airbag off indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag is automatically turned off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator in this situation will not come on.

The drivers advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the drivers seating position.

34

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

29

DRIVERS SEAT POSITION SENSOR

PASSENGERS SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

10/07/29 11:43:18 31TK4620_034

2011 TL

To ensure that the passengers advanced front airbag system will work properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-back forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the drivers or the passengers side airbag.

Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor (see page ). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the sensors and operation of the seat.

Back seat passengers should not wedge objects or intentionally force their feet under the front passenger seat.

529

How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passengers seat.

30

10/07/29 11:43:26 31TK4620_035

2011 TL

There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or another object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbags deployment path.

Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passengers seat.

If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbags deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in front, if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbags deployment path, the airbag will shut off.

33 Side Airbag Cutoff System

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

31

10/07/29 11:43:34 31TK4620_036

2011 TL

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision which causes the front airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem with your airbag system components.

:

178 181

How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

32

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

10/07/29 11:43:43 31TK4620_037

2011 TL

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/ stop button to set ON mode (see page ).

If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.

If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

If you see any of these indications, the airbag system components

This indicator alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does mean there is a problem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go out (see page ). If it doesnt come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked.

You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.

181 67

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works

not

D river

and P

assenger Safety

33

U. S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

10/07/29 11:43:53 31TK4620_038

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

may not work properly when you need them.

2011 TL

Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on.

If no weight is detected on the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.

This indicator alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passengers seat. It does there is a problem with the airbag.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works

not mean

34

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U. S. Canada

10/07/29 11:44:00 31TK4620_039

2011 TL

If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.

Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the drivers seat position sensor, the front passengers weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts and their anchors worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly.

Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced.

Airbag Service

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.

If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

35

10/07/29 11:44:08 31TK4620_040

2011 TL

Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.

If water or another liquid soaks into a seat- back, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.

This could make the drivers seat position sensor or the front passengers weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura Client Services.

In the US, call 800-382-2238, and in Canada ,call 888-9- ACURA-9.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety Precautions Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason.

Do not expose the front passengers seat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer.

36

10/07/29 11:44:13 31TK4620_041

2011 TL

Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to protect child passengers.

If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, traffic collisions are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

(see pages ). (see pages ).

42 52 53 56

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines D

river and

P assenger

Safety

37

Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.

10/07/29 11:44:21 31TK4620_042

2011 TL

Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page for important information about protecting larger children).

Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passengers front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passengers front airbag off under certain circumstances (see page ), please follow these guidelines:

According to crash statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.

Children who ride in the back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.

53

34 Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passengers front airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag can be hazardous.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag.

Infants

All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat

The Passengers Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

10/07/29 11:44:31 31TK4620_043

2011 TL

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Protecting Children General Guidelines D

river and

P assenger

Safety

39

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

10/07/29 11:44:43 31TK4620_044

2011 TL

Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.

Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in the back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.

If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.

During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page ).

53

155

18

16

147

If You Must Drive with Several Children

If a Child Requires Close Attention

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Never hold an infant or child on your lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.

Never let two children use the same seat belt.

Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors.

40

10/07/29 11:44:54 31TK4620_045

2011 TL

If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured. (See pages and for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.)

Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states, Canadian provinces and territories, and can be very hazardous.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .

For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch or with the keyless access remote in the vehicle can accidentally set the vehicle in

motion, possibly injuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page ).

Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch , and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.

50 51

:

178

150

On models with keyless access

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters or keyless access remotes out of the reach of children.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

41

10/07/29 11:45:00 31TK4620_046

system

2011 TL

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat makers weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a babys head, neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode.

If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.

If the passengers front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position.

Never

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

10/07/29 11:45:08 31TK4620_047

put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat.

2011 TL

In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces and territories allow a child one year of age or older who also meets the minimum size and weight requirements to transition from a rear-facing child seat to a forward facing seat. Know the requirements where you are driving and follow the child seat instructions. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat up to age two, if the childs height

and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants and Small Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.

10/07/29 11:45:15 31TK4620_048

2011 TL

Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat.

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.

34

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers airbag can be hazardous.

44

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

10/07/29 11:45:20 31TK4620_049

2011 TL

Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- compatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, to provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used.

Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the two outer seating positions in the back seat.

Rear-facing for infants, forward- facing for small children.

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used.

The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

3.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

45

10/07/29 11:45:27 31TK4620_050

2011 TL

After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:

All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.

After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be rock solid. Some side-to-side movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seats effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat makers instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rear- facing child seats.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

46

10/07/29 11:45:33 31TK4620_051

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) at the outer rear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:

Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

Use the pull strap to lower the anchor cover on the lower seat cushion that covers the LATCH anchor holes in the seat.

The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.

The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH.

1.

3.

2.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with LATCH

Installing a Child Seat D

river and

P assenger

Safety

47

LOWER ANCHORS Outer seating position

COVERS

STRAPS

BUTTON

10/07/29 11:45:43 31TK4620_052

2011 TL

Push the button located next to each rear head restraint to pivot the head restraint down.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat makers instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, follow the child seat makers instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.

4. 5.

6.

Installing a Child Seat

48

BUTTON

HEAD RESTRAINT

Outer seating position Rigid type Flexible type

10/07/29 11:45:51 31TK4620_053

2011 TL

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat.

Route the tether strap over the head restraint, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat makers instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle and remove any slack from the lap portion of the belt.

7.

8.

9.

1.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

D river

and P

assenger Safety

49

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

10/07/29 11:46:00 31TK4620_054

2011 TL

After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

50

10/07/29 11:46:07 31TK4620_055

2011 TL

To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.

After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), pivot the head restraint down (see page ) and route the tether strap over the head restraint.

1.

49 157

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Tether

Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor

D river

and P

assenger Safety

51

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

COVERANCHOR

10/07/29 11:46:15 31TK4620_056

2011 TL

Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.

Follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous column.

After properly securing the child seat (see page ), adjust the head restraint to its lowest position, then route the tether strap over the head restraint.

1.

2.

3.

2.

49

Using the Center Anchor

Installing a Child Seat

52

TETHER STRAP HOOK

COVER

ANCHOR

10/07/29 11:46:22 31TK4620_057

2011 TL

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:

Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?

Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the edge of

When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear the lap/ shoulder belt.

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

53

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.

10/07/29 11:46:29 31TK4620_058

the seat?

2011 TL

Does the shoulder belt cross between the childs neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs?

Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the booster seat makers instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.

Some states, Canadian provinces and territories also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states, provinces or territories where you intend to drive.

3.

4.

5.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

54

10/07/29 11:46:37 31TK4620_059

2011 TL

A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicles or boosters seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in the back seat.

If the passengers front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger childs body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.

Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages and ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout the ride.

16 53

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

55

10/07/29 11:46:45 31TK4620_060

2011 TL

If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owners manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear- most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is properly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.

This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.

This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve a childs comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety Precautions Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.

Two children should never use the same seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

56

10/07/29 11:46:53 31TK4620_061

2011 TL

Your vehicles exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:

With the trunk lid open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicles interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows, and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode. Select the mode. Set the fan speed to high. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a collision that may have damaged the underside.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard D

river and

P assenger

Safety

57

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

10/07/29 11:47:00 31TK4620_062

2011 TL

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

58

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

10/07/29 11:47:08 31TK4620_063

2011 TL

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels D

river and

P assenger

Safety

59

SUN VISOR

DOORJAMB

10/07/29 11:47:22 31TK4620_064

2011 TL

60

10/07/29 11:47:24 31TK4620_065

2011 TL

This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 62 ............................Instrument Panel . 63

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64 .............................................Gauges . 75

..................................Fuel Gauge . 75 ...................Temperature Gauge . 76

.............Multi-Information Display . 77 Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 130 Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 131 .......Turn Signals and Headlights . 133

Automatic Lighting Off ...................................Feature . 135

.........Daytime Running Lights . 136 .....................................Fog Lights . 137

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 137 ...............Hazard Warning Button . 139 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 139

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 140 .............................Keys and Locks . 141

......................Immobilizer System . 143 ..............................Ignition Switch . 145

....................................Door Locks . 146 ............Childproof Door Locks . 147

..............................................Trunk . 148 ......Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

.....................Remote Transmitter . 151 ...............................................Seats . 155

......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 160 ...........................................Mirrors . 161

Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 164

................Keyless Access System . 167 ...........Keyless Access Remote . 173

........Engine Start/Stop Button . 177 ..................................Seat Heaters . 196

............................Power Windows . 198 .......................................Moonroof . 202

...............................Parking Brake . 204 .........Interior Convenience Items . 205

.....................Beverage Holders . 206 ........Accessory Power Sockets . 207

..................................Glove Box . 208 .............Console Compartment . 208

............................Vanity Mirror . 209 ...................................Sun Visor . 209

...........................Center Pocket . 210 ....................Sunglasses Holder . 210

..................................Coat Hook . 211 ...............................Interior Lights . 211

Instruments and Controls Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

61

10/07/29 11:47:28 31TK4620_066

2011 TL

: If equipped

Control Locations

62

GAUGES MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS MOONROOF SWITCH

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

(P. 63) (P. 75)

(P. 77)

(P. 162)

(P. 164)

(P. 146)

(P. 148)

(P. 139)

AUDIO

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

(P. 198)

(P. 445)

(P. 447)

(P. 207)

HOMELINK BUTTONS

A/T model with navigation system is shown.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 465)

(P. 468)

(P. 207)

CLOCK COMPASS

(P. 225)

(P. 216)

(P. 202)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 196)

USB ADAPTER CABLE (P. 254, 263, 340, 350)

(P. 386)

(P. 374) (P. 379)

(P. 372)

10/07/29 11:47:36 31TK4620_067

2011 TL

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

63

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

SH-AWD INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATORIf equipped:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P. 68)

(P. 73)

(P. 68)

(P. 74) (P. 69)

(P. 72)

(P. 72)

(P. 67)

(P. 73)

(P. 65)

(P. 70)

(P. 71)

(P. 67)

(P. 66)

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAYSEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 64)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) OFF INDICATOR

(P. 72)

(P. 71)

A/T model is shown.

(P. 77)

(P. 71)

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR (P. 71)

(P. 65, 561)

(P. 64, 561)

(P. 64, 562)

(P. 65, 563)

10/07/29 11:47:46 31TK4620_068

2011 TL

The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, and you will see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals, and you will see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

20

:

178 181

562

561

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Malfunction

Low Oil

64

10/07/29 11:47:56 31TK4620_069

Indicator Lamp

Pressure Indicator

2011 TL

If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have inserted a properly coded ignition key, on models with keyless access system, if an appropriate keyless access remote is used. If it is not a properly coded key or keyless access remote, the indicator will blink, and the engines fuel system will be disabled (see page ).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the brakes and tires.

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

143

:

178 181

561

204

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel Indicators

Charging

Immobilizer

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

10/07/29 11:48:06 31TK4620_070

System Indicator

System Indicator

2011 TL

If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake system. You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID or CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages

. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

2. :

178

482

563

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

66

10/07/29 11:48:11 31TK4620_071

and 181

2011 TL

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passengers side airbag has automatically shut off. For more information, see page .

You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your airbag system components. You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

:

33

178 181

32

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

67

U.S. Canada

10/07/29 11:48:18 31TK4620_072

2011 TL

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position.

This indicator has two functions:

It flashes when VSA is active (see page ).

If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA or Hill Start Assist (on SH-AWD models only) system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM or CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it

checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages

.

If the VSA indicator illuminates, hill start assist will not be working. Without hill start assist, the vehicle will roll downhill immediately when you release the brake on an incline.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. For more information, see page .

1.

2. :

178

484

484 484

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator VSA OFF Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

68

10/07/29 11:48:27 31TK4620_073

and 181

2011 TL

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

This indicator has two functions:

If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicles tires are significantly low on pressure.

You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi- information display (see page ).

Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display and determine the cause (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multi- information display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page .

If this indicator begins to flash, there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. The indicator continues to flash for a while (approximately 1 minute), then stays on. If this happens, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible. For more information, see

.

1.

:

2.

178 181

490

489

572

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

69

10/07/29 11:48:36 31TK4620_074

page 488

2011 TL

The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see pages and ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.

When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash.

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the electric power steering system.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. The indicator will stay on, but should go off after driving a short distance. If it does not go off, or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the EPS may be turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.

If you turn the steering wheel to the full left or right position repeatedly while stopping or driving at very low speed, you may feel slightly harder steering in order to prevent damage to the steering system caused by overheating. This may also happen if you hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while.

You will also see a CHECK POWER STEERING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

:

181178

524 528

Instrument Panel Indicators

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Indicator

70

10/07/29 11:48:44 31TK4620_075

2011 TL

This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page .

This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page .

This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. Reminder beeps will also sound when you open the drivers door.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .

This indicator comes on red if any door or the trunk lid is not closed tightly.

You will also see a corresponding indicator(s) on the multi-information display to indicate which door and/ or the trunk is not closed tightly (see page ).

136

:

134

137

178 181

12

Instrument Panel Indicators

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Lights On Indicator Door/Trunk Open Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

71

10/07/29 11:48:54 31TK4620_076

2011 TL

This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page ).

This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page

for information on operating the cruise control.

This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page ) to see the message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page .

78 88

383

383

377

Instrument Panel Indicators

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

System Message Indicator

Security System Indicator

72

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

10/07/29 11:49:03 31TK4620_077

2011 TL

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a LOW FUEL message on the multi- information display.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the SH-AWD system. You will also see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

When the indicator comes on, there are about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) on SH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there is a very small amount of fuel in the tank.

:

178

478

479

181

CONTINUED

On SH-AWD models

Low Fuel Indicator Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

73

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:49:12 31TK4620_078

2011 TL

If the indicator blinks while driving, the differential temperature is too high.

You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display (see

).

Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you select the ON mode with the engine start/stop button (see page ). If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that there is a problem with the system.

If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless starting system. In this case, your vehicle may not restart. If you can continue to drive safely, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it checked as soon as possible. For more information, see page .This indicator has two functions:

If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless access system. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible. For more information, see page .

1.

2.

189

190

190

On models with keyless access system

Instrument Panel Indicators

Keyless Access System Indicator

74

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system.

10/07/29 11:49:20 31TK4620_079

page 479

2011 TL

This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition/power mode.

Fuel Gauge

Gauges Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

75

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TACHOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

U.S. model with automatic transmission is shown.

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

10/07/29 11:49:25 31TK4620_080

2011 TL

This shows the temperature of the engines coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the upper zone. If it reaches the red (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. Turn to page for instructions and precautions on checking the engine cooling system. If the pointer of the temperature

gauge reaches to or above the red mark, you will also see the WATER TEMP HOT message on the multi- information display. This will alert you that the engine should be cooled down.

559

Temperature Gauge

Gauges

76

10/07/29 11:49:29 31TK4620_081

2011 TL

CONTINUED

You can select the displayed language and also customize some vehicle control settings to your liking with the multi-information display and the three buttons on the steering wheel (see page ).

When you unlock and open the drivers door, the display shows DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 depending on which remote transmitter/keyless access remote

you use, and the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the position stored in that remote transmitter/ keyless access remote (see

).

The drivers ID (1 or 2) is displayed when the power mode is set to ON.

The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

There are three types of messages: normal display messages, engine oil life and maintenance messages, and system messages.

78

:

178 181

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

Normal Display Messages

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

77

Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 1 is used.

Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 2 is used.

10/07/29 11:49:37 31TK4620_082

page 164

2011 TL

These messages go off after several seconds.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the multi-information display changes as shown on page

each time you press the INFO ( / ) button or the SEL/RESET button.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, your last selection is displayed.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If you do not fasten your seat belt, you will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

These messages go off several seconds after the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

80

:

178 181

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

78

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( / )

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 11:49:45 31TK4620_083

2011 TL

CONTINUED

In the multi-information display, the system message is also displayed (see page ) and you can customize your vehicle control settings (see page ) .

In the normal display mode, the upper segment displays trip computer information, such as fuel economy or average speed. The lower segment displays the odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside temperature, and engine oil life and maintenance item code(s).

The multi-information display consists of an upper segment and a lower segment.

You will see some keyless access system messages until you select the ON mode by operating the engine start/stop button. These messages can be customized (see page ).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

87

:

178 181

92

106

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

79

LOWER SEGMENT

UPPER SEGMENT

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:49:52 31TK4620_084

2011 TL

Multi-Information Display

80

U.S. model is shown.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

1 :

2 : SH-AWD models only

Odometer (See page 81.)

Trip Meter (See page 81.)

Trip Computer (See page 82.)

Engine Oil Life (See page 84.)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 85.)

HFL (See page 86.)

Outside Temperature (See page 84.)

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor (See page 85.)

Keyless Memory Settings (See page 92.)

On models without navigation system only This display will be shown when the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.

1

2

TM

10/07/29 11:49:59 31TK4620_085

2011 TL

The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial/ territorial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the SEL/ RESET button until the number resets to 0.0.

When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A, average vehicle speed A, and elapsed time A are reset at the same time. When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B, average vehicle speed B, and elapsed time B are reset.

In the customizing mode, you can set Trip A and average fuel economy A to reset when you refuel your vehicle (see page ).102

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

81

TRIP METER A

CanadaU.S. U.S. Canada

TRIP METER B

ODOMETER

10/08/06 16:17:36 31TK4620_086

2011 TL

Along with the trip meter, the trip computer calculates these values:

Average Fuel Economy Average Vehicle Speed

Instant Fuel Economy Elapsed Time

Range

Trip Computer

Multi-Information Display

82

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button. U.S. model is shown.

Go to SH-AWD monitor (if equipped) or tire pressure monitor. See page 80 for how to switch the main menu display.

10/07/29 11:50:16 31TK4620_087

2011 TL

This shows your instant fuel economy.

This shows the accumulated traveling time since you last reset it. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME A or B is reset.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

This shows your vehicles average fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or liter/100 km (Canadian models) since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

You can customize the Trip A and AVG. FUEL A reset condition on the multi-information display (see

).

This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour (mph) for U.S. models or kilometers per hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

:

178 181

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. L/ 100 km (Canadian models)

ELAPSED TIME A/BAVG. FUEL A/B

AVG. SPEED A/B

RANGE

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

83

10/07/29 11:50:25 31TK4620_088

page 102

2011 TL

This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and Celsius temperature in Canadian models.

In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page ).

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.

This shows the remaining engine oil life. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions. For more information, see page .

101 497

Multi-Information Display

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life

84

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

ENGINE OIL LIFE U.S.

U.S. model is shown.

Canada

10/07/29 11:50:33 31TK4620_089

2011 TL

You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page .

This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel. For more information, see page .

488 478

SH-AWD models only

Tire Pressure Monitor SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

85

U.S.

Canada

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:50:40 31TK4620_090

2011 TL

You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicles HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.

To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked. Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to link your cell phone to HFL and how to receive or make phone calls, or visit the acura.com/handsfreelink website. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 528-7876.

You can see HFL information on the navigation screen (see page ).

394

408

Bluetooth

On models without navigation system

www.handsfreelink.ca

On models with navigation system

Multi-Information Display

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

86

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:50:46 31TK4620_091

2011 TL

If there is a problem with your vehicle, for example the engine oil level is low or a door is not fully closed, the multi-information display will show you the problem. It does this by interrupting the current display with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers the appropriate indicator(s) on the instrument panel, including the system message indicator, to come on. The system message indicator does not go off until the problem(s) is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when the system message comes on for the first time.

Most of the messages are displayed for about 5 seconds, and then the normal display returns. If there are several system messages to be shown, the display switches these messages every 5 seconds.

To switch the message(s) before 5 seconds have elapsed, press the INFO ( / ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / ) button, some messages stay on or come on again at regular intervals until the problem is corrected.

If the system message indicator remains lit on the instrument panel, you can see the corresponding message(s) again by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

On the next page is a list of all messages:

CONTINUED

System Messages

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

87

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 11:50:54 31TK4620_092

2011 TL

See page 33

See page 20

See page 20

See page 33

See page 485

See page 484

See page 482

See page 12

See page 204

See page 519

See page 561

See page 562

See page 561

See page 563

Multi-Information Display

88

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

SH-AWD model only

10/07/29 11:51:07 31TK4620_093

2011 TL

CONTINUED

See page 136

See page 462

See page 464

See page 76

See page 479

See page 479

See page 468

See page 489

See page 490

See page 490

See page 491

See page 491

See page 498

See page 499

See page 500

See page 70

See page 73

On models without

keyless access

system

On models with

keyless access

system

A/T model

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

89

U.S.

Canada

SH-AWD model only

SH-AWD model only

U.S. model shown

U.S. model shown

10/07/29 11:51:21 31TK4620_094

2011 TL

See page 145

See page 190

See page 190

See page 187

See page 188

See page 192

See page 194

See page 193

See page 182

See page 184

See page 185

See page 182

See page 514

See page 447

Multi-Information Display

On models with keyless access system

90

On models without keyless access system

Canadian models only A/T model only

A/T model only

A/T model only

M/T model only

10/07/29 11:51:33 31TK4620_095

2011 TL

See page 183

See page 182

See page 185

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

91

10/07/29 11:51:39 31TK4620_096

2011 TL

You can customize some vehicle control settings. To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park (automatic) or with the parking brake set (manual).

If you try to enter the customizing mode while the vehicle is moving, you will see a MUST STOP AND SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE SETTINGS (automatic) or MUST STOP AND SET PARK BRAKE TO CHANGE SETTINGS (manual) message and you cannot change the settings.

You can customize some vehicle control settings for DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 separately.

To have the drivers ID detected, make sure the drivers door is unlocked with a corresponding remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages and

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, move the shift lever out of Park (automatic) or release the parking brake (manual), the display will change to the normal screen.

:

178 181 .

Keyless Memory Settings

Multi-Information Display

92

TM

10/07/29 11:51:45 31TK4620_097

2011 TL

Refer to the table on the following pages about the settings you want to customize.

If you want to change any vehicle control settings, select Keyless Memory Settings by pressing either INFO button ( / ), then press the SEL/RESET button. Select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

If you use the key to unlock the drivers door, the system cannot recognize either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.

CONTINUED

On models without keyless access system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

93

DRIVERS ID

Press the SEL/RESET button.

U.S. model is shown.

TM

10/07/29 11:51:50 31TK4620_098

2011 TL

LOW MIN OFF

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET

ADJUST ALARM VOLUME

AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION

KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS MEMORY POSITION LINK

METER SETUP (P.99)

POSITION SETUP (P.108)

100

101

102

104

105

106

109

ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH

5F 0F 5F (U.S.)

3C 0C 3C (Canada) WITH REFUEL MANUAL ONLY IGN OFF HIGH MID LOW MAX HIGH MID ON OFF ON OFF

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above or below its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to reset when you refuel.

Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three levels.

Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.

Changes the display of the keyless start guidance screens. Changes the drivers seat and the outside mirror positions to a stored setting.

1 : 2 :

Default setting Only on models with keyless access system

Menu ItemGroup Setup PageSetting OptionDescription

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Multi-Information Display

94

10/07/29 11:51:56 31TK4620_099

2011 TL

Description Setting OptionMenu Item

CONTINUED

Group Setup Page Changes which doors unlock when you use the remote or grab the drivers door handle. Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/ pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights come on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO position.

15 sec

0 sec

LOW MIN

DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS ON OFF

ON OFF

60 sec 30 sec 60 sec 30 sec 15 sec MAX HIGH MID

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP (P.111)

LIGHTING SETUP (P.116)

112

113

114

117

118

119

1 : 2 :

Default setting Only on models with keyless access system

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

95

10/07/29 11:52:03 31TK4620_100

2011 TL

PageDescriptionMenu ItemGroup Setup Setting Option

122

123

125

126

127

129

Changes when the doors automatically lock.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Changes which doors unlock with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote on the first push. The exterior lights flash each time you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound when you press the LOCK button twice. Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock but do not open the door. Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP (P.121)

DEFAULT ALL (P.129)

SHIFT FROM P (A/T only) WITH VEHICLE SPEED OFF SHIFT TO P/DRIVER DOOR (A/T only) SHIFT TO P/ALL DOORS (A/T only) IGN OFF/DRIVER DOOR IGN OFF/ALL DOORS OFF DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS

ON OFF

90 sec 60 sec 30 sec CANCEL SET

Default setting1 : 2 : 3 :

Default setting for automatic transmission Default setting for manual transmission

1

2

3

1

1

1

Multi-Information Display

96

10/07/29 11:52:09 31TK4620_101

2011 TL

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:

METER SETUP

When you want to change the vehicle control settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes, select EXIT. The display returns to the normal display.

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP LIGHTING SETUP

If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on page .

POSITION SETUP KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP

: Only on models with keyless access system

129

CONTINUED

Customize Settings

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

97

10/07/29 11:52:18 31TK4620_102

2011 TL

Multi-Information Display

98

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: On models with keyless access system only

DEFAULT ALL See page 129.

METER SETUP See page 99.

POSITION SETUP See page 108.

LIGHTING SETUP See page 116.

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP See page 121.

KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP See page 111.

10/07/29 11:52:23 31TK4620_103

2011 TL

LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET ADJUST ALARM VOLUME AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION

Here are the five or six custom settings for the meter setup:

KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system

Meter Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

99

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 106.

See page 105.

See page 104.

See page 102.

See page 101.

See page 100.

On models with keyless access system only

10/07/29 11:52:32 31TK4620_104

2011 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

While METER SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Language Selection

Multi-Information Display

100

10/07/29 11:52:40 31TK4620_105

2011 TL

If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the setting.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to LANGUAGE SELECTION and repeat the procedure again.

The displayed number is the current adjustment above or below the outside temperature.

Adjust the outside temperature value by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to set the desired value.

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

101

Canadian modelsU.S. models

10/07/29 11:52:49 31TK4620_106

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY and repeat the procedure again.

You can select the reset timing of the Trip A information: Trip A, Average Fuel Economy A, Average Vehicle Speed A, and Elapsed Time A.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

WITH REFUEL The Trip A information is reset every time you refuel your vehicle.

MANUAL ONLY You can reset the Trip A information when Trip A is displayed (see page ).

There are three reset choices you can make:

IGN OFF The Trip A information is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

81

:

178 181

Trip Computer Trip A Info Reset

Multi-Information Display

102

U.S. models Canadian models

10/07/29 11:52:59 31TK4620_107

2011 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET and repeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

103

10/07/29 11:53:06 31TK4620_108

2011 TL

Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volume from three levels.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired level by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST ALARM VOLUME and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

104

10/07/29 11:53:13 31TK4620_109

2011 TL

Auto Interior Illumination While the headlight switch is turned on, the interior lights gradually dim, as the outside light level gets low. You can customize at which outside light level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW and MIN levels and OFF for the auto interior illumination settings.

If you want the illuminations to start dimming as early as possible, select MAX. For illuminations to start dimming as late as possible, select MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW for levels in between.

To disable the auto interior illumination function, select OFF.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

105

10/07/29 11:53:22 31TK4620_110

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION and repeat the procedure again.

When this item is set to ON, you will see some guidance messages on the multi-information display. You can change this setting between on and off. For more information on start guidance messages, see page .

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

182

Keyless Start Guidance Screens On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

106

10/07/29 11:53:28 31TK4620_111

2011 TL

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

107

10/07/29 11:53:34 31TK4620_112

2011 TL

You can customize the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting in position setup.

While POSITION SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes asshown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the custom setting then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Position Setup

Multi-Information Display

108

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 109.

10/07/29 11:53:40 31TK4620_113

2011 TL

Memory Position Link

On models with keyless access system

When Memory Position Link is set to ON, the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. To cause the memory to activate, open the drivers door with the remote transmitter. On models with keyless access system, open the drivers door with the remote, or grab the door handle while carrying the remote.

To set the memory positions, see page .

For information on using the remote, see page .

You can choose this item to customize from POSITION SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

164

167

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

109

10/07/29 11:53:48 31TK4620_114

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to MEMORY POSITION LINK and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

110

10/07/29 11:53:53 31TK4620_115

2011 TL

then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

While KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

There are three custom settings for the keyless access setup:

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system Keyless Access Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

111

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

See page 112.

See page 113.

See page 114.

10/07/29 11:54:01 31TK4620_116

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes asshown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize,

2011 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

To select whether the drivers door or all doors unlock when you open the drivers door with the remote or by grabbing the door handle (while carrying the remote), follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button .

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to DOOR UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.

Door Unlock Mode

Multi-Information Display

112

10/07/29 11:54:09 31TK4620_117

2011 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH is set to ON, some exterior lights blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

The same exterior lights blink once when you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote.

Keyless Access Light Flash

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

113

10/07/29 11:54:16 31TK4620_118

SEL/RESET button.

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is set to ON, the beeper sounds twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH and repeat the procedure again.

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

When you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote, the beeper sounds once.

Keyless Access Beep

Multi-Information Display

114

10/07/29 11:54:23 31TK4620_119

2011 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.Select ON or OFF by pressing the

INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

115

10/07/29 11:54:29 31TK4620_120

2011 TL

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Here are the three custom settings for the lighting setup:

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

Lighting Setup

Multi-Information Display

116

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 117.

See page 118.

See page 119.

10/07/29 11:54:37 31TK4620_121

then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen chang asshown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize,

es

2011 TL

Interior Light Dimming Time

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME and repeat the procedure again.

The interior lights fade out when you close all doors. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Select the desired setting (15 sec, 30 sec, or 60 sec) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

117

10/07/29 11:54:45 31TK4620_122

2011 TL

Headlight Auto Off Timer

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you remove the key from the ignition switch and close the drivers door. On models with keyless access system, the lights go off after the selected time when you close the drivers door and take the remote with you. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:

Select the desired setting (60 sec,

Multi-Information Display

118

10/07/29 11:54:51 31TK4620_123

30 sec, 15 sec or 0 sec) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

( / )

2011 TL

Auto Light Sensitivity

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER and repeat the procedure again.

The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from the following five levels: MAX The headlights come on when it is bright.

HIGH The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright.

MID The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise.

LOW The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark.

MIN The headlights come on when it is dark.

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

119

10/07/29 11:55:01 31TK4620_124

( / )

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY and repeat the procedure again.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting (MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

120

10/07/29 11:55:06 31TK4620_125

2011 TL

AUTO DOOR LOCK

Here are the five custom settings for the door setup:

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE

CONTINUED

Door/Window Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

121

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 123.

See page 125.

See page 126.

See page 127.

See page 122.

10/07/29 11:55:17 31TK4620_126

then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen chang asshown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize,

es

2011 TL

Auto Door Lock

(Automatic transmission model only)

There are three settings you can choose from:

SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

OFF The auto door lock is deactivated all the time.

WITH VEHICLE SPEED The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 16 km/h).

Multi-Information Display

122

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 11:55:25 31TK4620_127

( / )

2011 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR LOCK and repeat the procedure again.

There are five possible settings for automatic transmission models and three possible settings for manual transmission models.

DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TOP The drivers door unlocks when

you move the shift lever to Park with the brake pedal depressed.

ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF All the doors unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

OFF The auto door unlock is deactivated all the time.

DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF The drivers door unlocks when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P All the doors unlock when you move the shift lever to Park with the brake pedal depressed.

181178

:

Auto Door Unlock

Automatic transmission model only

Automatic transmission model only

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

123

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 11:55:34 31TK4620_128

2011 TL

Press the INFO ( / ) button to switch the door lock mode setting between the drivers door and all doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you choose IGN OFF, you will see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

Multi-Information Display

124

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 11:55:40 31TK4620_129

( / )

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.You can select whether the drivers

door or all the doors unlock the first time you press the unlock button on the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR UNLOCK and repeat the procedure again.

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

125

10/07/29 11:55:49 31TK4620_130

( / )

2011 TL

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

When you press the LOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, some exterior lights flash, and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds to verify that the doors and the trunk are locked and the security system has set (see page ). You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound.

When you press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote to unlock the drivers door/all the doors (depending on the customize setting), the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the door(s) is unlocked and the security system is turned off.

To turn this feature on or off, follow these instructions.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

377

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

Multi-Information Display

126

10/07/29 11:55:56 31TK4620_131

( / )

2011 TL

CONTINUED

When you unlock the doors by touching either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote, the relock time is fixed in 30 seconds.

You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock, and the security system sets.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT and repeat the procedure again.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

Security Relock Timer

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

127

10/07/29 11:56:04 31TK4620_132

2011 TL

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to SECURITY RELOCK TIMER and repeat the procedure again.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO

button repeatedly.

Multi-Information Display

128

10/07/29 11:56:11 31TK4620_133

( / )

2011 TL

If you want to set the default settings,

press the INFO ( / ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

If the setting is not successfully completed, FAILED is shown for several seconds, and then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the same procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to the previous display.

To set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select SET then press the SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to the default all setting display.

DEFAULT ALL

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

129

10/07/29 11:56:19 31TK4620_134

2011 TL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped Refer to the navigation system owners manual.

1 : 2 : 3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

130

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

PADDLE SHIFTERSREMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS

HEADLIGHT WASHERS

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS

HORN

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

(P. 137)

(P. 133, 137)

(P. 132)

(P. 140) (P. 78)

(P. 131)

A/T model with navigation system is shown.

(P. 485)

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM

(P. 191)

(P. 196)

NAVIGATION DISPLAY

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 139)

CENTER DISPLAY

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON (P. 139, 163)

INTERFACE DIAL SELECTOR KNOB (P. 226)

(P. 273)

(P. 217, 274)

(P. 34)

(P. 178)

(P. 473) (P. 370)

(P. 389, 406)

(P. 383)

2

1

3

3

3

2

10/07/29 11:56:28 31TK4620_135

2011 TL

MIST OFF INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down to select a position.

The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay ( position), the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicles speed.

Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete a few more sweeps after you release the lever.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CONTINUED

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

131

ADJUSTMENT RING

10/07/29 11:56:36 31TK4620_136

2011 TL

When you activate the windshield washer with the headlights turned on, the headlight washer will be activated under certain conditions. For more information, see

section in the next column.

The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washers.

The headlight washers can be operated at any time by pressing the headlight washer button located next to the steering wheel column. The headlights must be turned on to use this button. In addition, the headlight washer will automatically turn on the first time you turn on the windshield washers while the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

Canadian SH-AWD models only Headlight Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Headlight Washers

Canadian SH-AWD models only

132

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

10/07/29 11:56:42 31TK4620_137

2011 TL

Push down on the left lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever and hold it. The lever will return to the center when you release it or complete a turn.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in either of these positions, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder.

Turn Signal Off Parking and instrument panel AUTO Headlights on High beams Flash high beams Fog lights off Fog lights on

This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .

If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch, or with the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you will hear reminder beeps when you open the drivers door.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

:

178 181

CONTINUED

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

133

10/07/29 11:56:50 31TK4620_138

2011 TL

The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights and all other exterior lights when it senses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turn the light switch to AUTO. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.

Push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page ). Pull the lever back to return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back.

The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you remove the key and open the drivers door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or turn the light switch to the position.

Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The lights will remain on when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). They will turn off automatically when you open the drivers door and take the remote with you. To turn them on again, either set the power mode to ON or turn the light switch to the

position.

To change the AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY setting, see

.

Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.

71

On all models

On models with keyless access system AUTO

High Beams

Headlights

134

10/07/29 11:56:57 31TK4620_139

On models without keyless access system

page 119

2011 TL

The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.

The automatic lighting off feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the drivers door, or on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door.

If you remove the key (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system), and the drivers door is opened and closed, the automatic lighting off feature activates with the headlight switch in the or position, or the lights turned on by setting the switch in the AUTO position.

To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .178

:

118

CONTINUED

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Headlights Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

135

LIGHT SENSOR

10/07/29 11:57:05 31TK4620_140

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

With the headlight switch off or in the position, the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

The lights will turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights will go off. With the drivers door open, you will hear a lights on reminder beeper.

:

178 :

178 181

181

Headlights

Daytime Running Lights

136

10/07/29 11:57:11 31TK4620_141

2011 TL

Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam.

With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off.

Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel by pressing the or button with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. Press the button to increase the brightness and the button to decrease it.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

CONTINUED

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

137

FOG LIGHT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS

10/07/29 11:57:20 31TK4620_142

2011 TL

To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glare reduction function, set the brightness to the highest level, then press the button. You will hear a beep when it is canceled.

When the brightness reaches the maximum level, BRIGHTNESS MAXIMUM LEVEL appears on the display.

The level of brightness is shown on the multi-information display while you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting.

If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, the navigation system screen will also go to full brightness. This can be helpful when using the headlights during daylight hours.

Instrument Panel Brightness

138

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:57:25 31TK4620_143

2011 TL

Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger clears fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off within about 10 to 30 minutes according to the outside temperature. It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch, or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on

models with keyless access system. You have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side to side.

Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on or off. For more information, see page .163

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

139

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 11:57:34 31TK4620_144

2011 TL

Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in that position.

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.

Push the lever under the steering column all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

140

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

10/07/29 11:57:40 31TK4620_145

2011 TL

You should have received a key number tag with your key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only an Acura-approved key blank.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Protect the key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.

The valet key does not contain a battery. Do not try to take it apart.

The valet key works only in the ignition and the drivers door lock. You can keep the trunk pass-through cover and the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility.

The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle.

CONTINUED

Keys and Locks Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

141

VALET KEY (GRAY)

KEY NUMBER TAG

MASTER KEY WITH REMOTE TRANSMITTER

10/07/29 11:57:48 31TK4620_146

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

Always make sure the key is fully extended when you insert it to the ignition switch. If the key is not fully extended, the immobilizer system may not operate properly and prevent the engine from starting.

The master key can be retracted into the remote transmitter. To use the key, push the release button to release the key from the transmitter. The key should be fully extended. To retract the key, push the release button and at the same time push the key into the remote transmitter until it is securely latched.

The key may come in contact with your finger while being retracted or extended. Make sure your fingers do not touch the pivot of the key when retracting or extending it.

Each keyless access remote has a built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.

The built-in key (see page ) fits all the locks on your vehicle.

195

On models with keyless access systemRetractable Master Key

Keys and Locks

142

Push

RELEASE BUTTON

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

10/07/29 11:57:56 31TK4620_147

2011 TL

CONTINUED

You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key or keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, or select the ON mode with the engine start/ stop button, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key or keyless access remote.

On models without keyless access system, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again.

On models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again.

The system may not recognize your keys or remotes coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key chain) is near the ignition switch or the keyless access remote when you insert the key or set the power mode to ON.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. See page for a comparison between conventional power switches and your engine start/stop button. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page .

181

178

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Immobilizer System

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

143

10/07/29 11:58:04 31TK4620_148

On models without keyless access system

:

2011 TL

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key or keyless access remote, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key or keyless access remote and you cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

144

Always take the ignition key or the keyless access remote with the built-in key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone.

10/07/29 11:58:10 31TK4620_149

2011 TL

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key.

You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.

This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.

You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position and open the drivers door. Remove the key to turn off the beeper.

Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the key.

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III).

You will also see a REMOVE KEY message on the multi-information display.

The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

You can insert or remove the key only in this position. To turn the key, you must push the key in slightly. The shift lever must also be in Park.

Go to page for information on the engine start/stop button.

179 On models with keyless access system

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III) LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

145

10/07/29 11:58:18 31TK4620_150

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

You can customize the door lock/ unlock settings (see page ).

You can open or close the windows and the moonroof by using the key in the drivers door (see page ).

To lock all doors, push the front of the master door lock switch on either front door, pull the lock tab rearward on the drivers door, or turn the key counterclockwise in the outside lock on the drivers door.

All doors can be locked from the outside by using the key in the drivers door. To unlock only the drivers door, insert the key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds.

The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is

When the door is unlocked, you can see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle.

The lock tab on any passengers door locks and unlocks that door.

Pushing the rear of either master door lock switch will unlock all doors. Pushing forward the lock tab on the drivers door unlocks only that door.

121

200

On models with keyless access system

Door Locks

146

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Lock

LOCK TAB

RED INDICATOR Unlock

Lock

10/07/29 11:58:28 31TK4620_151

disabled. For more information, see page .195

Unlock

2011 TL

If you forget and leave the key in the ignition switch, lockout prevention will not allow you to lock the drivers door. With any door open and the key in the ignition switch, locking with the master door lock switch is disabled. If the drivers door is closed, the lock tab on the drivers door is not disabled. Pulling the drivers lock tab rearward will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open drivers door by pulling the lock tab

door.

The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle.

To lock any passengers door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.

To lock the drivers door, remove the key from the ignition switch, pull the lock tab rearward or push the front of the master switch, then close the door.

When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.

When you shift to P after driving, the drivers door unlocks.

When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) after driving, the drivers door unlocks.

Default setting

Automatic transmission:

Manual transmission:

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

147

LEVER

Unlock

Lock

10/07/29 11:58:38 31TK4620_152

On models without keyless access system

On models without keyless access system

tab rearward, the drivers door lock tab pops out and unlocks the drivers

2011 TL

If the doors are unlocked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid.

If the doors are locked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid with the remote in keyless access operating range.

You can open the trunk in any of the following ways:

Press the trunk release button on the drivers door.

Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote.

To open the trunk from the outside, push the release switch, then lift up.

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors and trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. For more information, see page .

To unlock the trunk, turn the key twice to unlock the doors, push the rear of either master door lock switch, or push UNLOCK twice on the keyless access remote.

The trunk will lock when you lock the drivers door with the key , the keyless access remote, either master door lock switch, or the lock tab on the drivers door.

:

195

On models with keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

Trunk

148

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON On models with keyless access system

10/07/29 11:58:46 31TK4620_153

2011 TL

If your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected, you can open the trunk from the rear seat by pulling the trunk release tab through the trunk pass-through.

Pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at the top of the inner partition, and press on the button to fully release the cover. Reach in and locate the rubber tab, and pull it out.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging it, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

, page .

To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.

57

CONTINUED

On all models

Trunk

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

149

INNER HANDLE

BUTTON

COVER

TAB

INNER PARTITION

RUBBER TAB

10/07/29 11:58:54 31TK4620_154

2011 TL

To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk release button on the drivers door by turning off the trunk main switch in the glove box, locking the glove box, and locking the trunk pass-through

built-in key.

If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.

As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the trunk latch so the trunk can be opened from the inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature. For more information about child safety, see page .

To use the valet function, remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key (see page ).

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency fuel lid release in the trunk. Refer to page for how to access it.

40

195

564

On models with keyless access system

Trunk

Emergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Fuel Lid Release

150

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

Vehicle with keyless access system is shown.

10/07/29 11:59:04 31TK4620_155

cover with the master key or the

On models without keyless access system

OFF

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door or all the doors (depending on the keyless memory setting). Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button.

Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system has set. You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed or if the key is in the ignition switch.

If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

The keyless lock acknowledgment beep and flashing of the lights can be deactivated (see page ).

The door activated map lights come on when you press the UNLOCK button if the door activated position is selected. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds (or whatever setting of the interior light dimming time is set to), the light(s) will fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed, the light(s) will go off immediately.

To change the lock/unlock setting and the relock timer setting, refer to the customized settings on page .

You can also open all power windows and the moonroof from outside the vehicle with the remote transmitter (see page ).

126

200

121

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

LOCK

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

151

LOCK BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK BUTTON

LED

UNLOCK BUTTON

10/07/29 11:59:12 31TK4620_156

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

Be careful when removing this screw as the head of the screw can strip out.

Separate the keypad from the transmitter by pushing any button from outside.

If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

On models with keyless access system, see page for how to replace the battery on the keyless access remote.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small Phillips-head screwdriver.

Press and hold this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk if the key is in the ignition switch.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound, and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

1.

2.

175

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryTRUNK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter Care

152

NOTE:

KEYPADSCREW

10/07/29 11:59:23 31TK4620_157

2011 TL

Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same ( side facing up), then insert it in the keypad.

Place a cloth on the edge of the keypad to prevent scratches, and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver or coin.

An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad, then install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

3.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Remote Transmitter Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

153

BATTERY

10/07/29 11:59:31 31TK4620_158

2011 TL

When you unlock the drivers door with your remote transmitter, each remote transmitter activates the customized settings related to that remote.

When you unlock and open the drivers door with the remote, the drivers seat (except power lumbar) and outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. An indicator on one of the driving position memory buttons on the drivers door also comes on.

You will also see the DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 message on the multi- information display, depending on which linked remote transmitter is used.Driving position memory

(see page ).

Customized settings (see page ).

Here are the settings activated with the remote:

The driving position memory activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is shown on the back of each transmitter. Make sure you store your desired driving position in the memory that is activated by the transmitter you normally carry.

Audio system settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

164

97

226

216

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized Driving Position

154

Driver 1 Driver 2

10/07/29 11:59:40 31TK4620_159

2011 TL

CONTINUED

See pages for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.

Drivers seat only:

1513

The passenger seat has the same adjustments as the drivers seat but without any lumbar adjustment.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat up and forward, or down and backward. The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.

The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom. You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I),

and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

Moves the seat forward and backward.

Moves the front of the seat up or down.

Increases or decreases the lumbar support.

:

178

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

155

Drivers seat

10/07/29 11:59:53 31TK4620_160

and 181 .

2011 TL

They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from the likelihood of whiplash and other injuries.

The drivers seat includes a memory feature. Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You can then select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate memory button. Refer to page for how to memorize and select the seat positions.

164

See page for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints.

15

Seats

Head Restraints

156

Passengers seat

10/07/29 11:59:59 31TK4620_161

2011 TL

CONTINUED

The head restraints adjust for height. You need both hands to adjust the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise a front or rear center head restraint, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down.

To lower either rear outer head restraint for better visibility, press the tilt button on the side of the head restraint. It folds down backward. To raise the rear outer head restraint, pull it up from behind by hand. Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you lower or raise it.

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

157

Front

LEGS

SEAT- BACK

CUSHION

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center CUSHION

SEAT-BACK

RELEASE BUTTON

LEGS

TILT BUTTON

Rear Outer

10/07/29 12:00:06 31TK4620_162

2011 TL

When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back in place. Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it.

To remove a front or rear center head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

To remove either rear outer head restraint, push the tilt button, then fold the head restraint backward. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

158

Rear Outer TILT BUTTON

RELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

10/07/29 12:00:13 31TK4620_163

2011 TL

The drivers and front passengers seats have active head restraints. If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear, the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will automatically move forward.

This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupants head. It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.

For a head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.

Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its proper location.

Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints.

If the restraints do not return to their normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position.

Active Head Restraints

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

159

10/07/29 12:00:21 31TK4620_164

2011 TL

The lid of the console compartment can be used as an armrest.

The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.

A beverage holder is located in the armrest.

To open the cover, pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at the top of the inner partition, and press on the button to fully release the cover. To close the cover, swing it up, and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly.

Trunk Pass-through CoverArmrest

Seats

160

Front

Rear

TAB

INNER PARTITION COVER

BUTTON To lock

10/07/29 12:00:29 31TK4620_165

2011 TL

Make sure all items in the trunk and those extending through the pass- through are secured.

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this feature.

For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the master key(the built-in key on models with keyless access system). To lock the cover, insert the key, and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open. See on page .57

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats, Mirrors Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

161

AUTO BUTTON

SENSORINDICATOR

There is also a sensor on the back of the mirror. Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and af f ect its perf ormance.

10/07/29 12:00:37 31TK4620_166

2011 TL

Both outside door mirrors have a reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, the selected mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park. Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original position.

To tilt the drivers mirror, place the selector switch in the left position.

To tilt the passengers mirror, place the switch in the right position.

To turn the feature off, place the switch in the center position.

Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page ).

When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, move the selector switch to the L (drivers side), or R (passengers side).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

3.

1.

2.

164

:

178 181

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

Mirrors

162

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

10/07/29 12:00:45 31TK4620_167

2011 TL

This heated mirror function has a timer (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If the outside temperature is below 41F (5C), the heated mirror function will come on automatically for 10 minutes when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

139

:

178 181

Mirrors

Power Mirror Heaters

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

163

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

10/07/29 12:00:51 31TK4620_168

2011 TL

Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory feature for the drivers seat and outside mirror positions.

Seat, except for power lumbar, and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button or using the appropriate remote transmitter or the keyless access remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).

Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page ).

Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility (see page ).

Press and release the SET button on the control panel. You will hear a beep. Immediately press and hold one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator in the memory button will come on. The current positions of the drivers seat and outside mirrors are now stored.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

3.

1.

2.

162

155

:

178 181

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System

164

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

10/07/29 12:00:59 31TK4620_169

2011 TL

Fail to press a memory button within 5 seconds.

Readjust the seat position.

To cancel the storing procedure after pressing the SET button, do any of the following:

Readjust the outside mirror position.

To select a memorized position, do this:

Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that buttons memory. If you want to add a new position while retaining the current one, use the other memory button.

Change the power mode out from ON.

Turn the ignition switch out from the ON (II) position.

Make sure the parking brake is set and the shift lever is in Park (automatic).

Press the desired memory button (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then release the button.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

165

MEMORY BUTTONS

10/07/29 12:01:08 31TK4620_170

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

If desired, you can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized positions. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this driving position for later use, you must store it in the driving position memory.

To stop the systems automatic adjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat.

The system will move the seat and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments are complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will remain on.

To change the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting, see page

.

Press any button on the drivers door: SET, memory button 1 or 2.

If the parking brake is not set, you must press and hold the memory button until the adjustment is complete.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Shift out of Park (automatic).

Release the parking brake (manual).On vehicles with manual transmission

Driving Position Memory System

166

10/07/29 12:01:16 31TK4620_171

page 109

2011 TL

Always keep the remote and the built-in key away from any magnetic material.

You should have received a key number tag with your built-in key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Your vehicle has a keyless access system. This system allows you to operate the vehicle without an ignition key. When you carry the remote with you, you can lock/ unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk, and start the engine.

When the vehicle battery is dead. When the remote battery is dead.

A vehicle is being operated with a transmitter nearby.

The remote is covered by metal.

You carry a cell phone, a laptop computer, or other electrical device near the remote.

There is strong electrical current nearby.

The battery of the remote is weak. The system may not work if:

Each keyless access remote has a built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.

Make sure the driver always carries the remote/built-in key set.

Protect the remote and the built-in key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the remote or the built-in key, and do not set heavy objects on them.

Keep the remote and the built-in key away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

The built-in keys do not contain batteries.

On models with navigation system

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

167

10/07/29 12:01:27 31TK4620_172

2011 TL

The following keys come with your vehicle. Refer to page for how to separate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock the doors, glove box, and trunk pass- through cover.

This remote is used to lock/unlock the doors and unlock the trunk. When you carry the remote, you can lock/unlock the doors, unlock the trunk, and start the engine.

Anyone can lock/unlock a door or open the trunk if the remote is within the operating range of the door or the trunk.

You can lock/unlock the doors within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the trunk release switch.

195

Keys

Keyless Access System

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

168

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATING RANGE

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTES

KEY NUMBER TAG

10/07/29 12:01:36 31TK4620_173

2011 TL

The remote may not work if: It is too close to the vehicle. It is above or below the vehicle, even when it is within its operating range.

The handle of each front door has a sensor. That sensor works with the remote so you can automatically unlock the door(s).

By default, only the drivers door unlocks when you grab its handle.

Each front door has a LOCK/ UNLOCK feature.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

To unlock the remaining doors and the trunk, press the UNLOCK button on the remote or the rear of the master door lock switch on the drivers door.

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

All the doors unlock when you grab the handle of the front passengers door.

When you unlock the door(s), some exterior lights blink twice and the system beeps twice.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see

.

112

114

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Unlocking the Door(s)

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

169

10/07/29 12:01:45 31TK4620_174

page 113

2011 TL

Before locking the doors, make sure the remote is not inside the vehicle.

When you press the door lock button on the front door, all the doors and the trunk will lock.

The remote is not within the operating range.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

When the doors are unlocked.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

Each unlock sensor does not operate when:

If you wear a glove while grabbing a front door handle, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.

If you do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock.

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by unlocking the doors.

Keyless Access System

Locking the Doors

170

DOOR LOCK BUTTON

10/07/29 12:01:54 31TK4620_175

2011 TL

When you lock the doors, some exterior lights blink and the system beeps once. If no exterior lights blink and/or no beeper sounds, check to see if the trunk or hood is open.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see

.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

Within 2 seconds of pressing the door lock button or locking the doors with the remote, pull the handle to make sure the doors are actually locked. The door unlock sensors will not operate for about 2 seconds after the doors are locked.

The door lock button does not work if: The remote is not within the operating range.

If you open the drivers door, pull its lock tab rearward on the door, and shut it when the remote is inside the vehicle, the drivers door will unlock. Make sure you carry the remote with you when you lock the doors.

Any door is open.

The power mode is not set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

The remote is in the keyless access slot.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

The remote battery is dead.

The vehicle battery is dead.

This function is also activated on the front passengers door. If you open the front passengers door, and shut it after pulling its lock tab rearward when the remote is inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock.

The door lock prevention will also activate if you try to lock the doors with the master door lock switch when the remote is inside the vehicle.

114

Keyless Access System

Door Lock Prevention

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

171

10/07/29 12:02:05 31TK4620_176

page 113

2011 TL

When you close the trunk with all doors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors with the remote, built-in key or power door lock master switch, the trunk will unlock.

The remote is too close to the trunk lid.

The trunk cannot be locked if:

The remote is on the interior rear panel.

The remote is too close to the seat-back of the rear seat or the seat cushion.

You can open the trunk in any of these ways:

Push the trunk release switch when carrying the remote (if the doors are locked).

Press the trunk release button inside the vehicle.

Press the trunk button on the remote.

To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.

Push the trunk release switch when the doors are unlocked.

Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Opening and Closing the Trunk

Keyless Access System

172

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

INNER HANDLE

10/07/29 12:02:16 31TK4620_177

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Before closing the trunk, make sure the remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when the remote is in it, the system beeps, and the trunk reopens.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page .

Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed, if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or if the power mode is in any position except VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

57

Keyless Access System

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Keyless Access Remote

LOCK

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

173

LED

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

LOCK BUTTON

UNLOCK BUTTON

10/07/29 12:02:24 31TK4620_178

2011 TL

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door. Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. The door activated map lights (if the door activated light switch is set) will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the map lights fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote before 30 seconds have elapsed, the lights will go off immediately.

Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk with the exterior trunk release switch if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or the power mode is in any position except VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). You cannot open the trunk with the remote if the trunk main switch in the glove box is turned off.

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote.

To change the KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE setting, see

.

To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT setting, see page .

To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page

.

If you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME, see page .

126

117

UNLOCK TRUNK

PANIC

Keyless Access System

174

10/07/29 12:02:31 31TK4620_179

page 127

page 125

2011 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Battery type: CR2032 Replace the battery if necessary.

To replace the battery:

Replace the old battery with a new battery. Place the battery so the side is facing up. Snap the two halves of the remote case back together.

Remove the built-in key (see page ).

Place a cloth on the edge to prevent scratches, then remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

1.

2.

3.

195

Replacing the Remote Battery

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

175

10/07/29 12:02:40 31TK4620_180

2011 TL

Here are the settings activated with the remote:

Driving position memory (see page ).

Audio system settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

When you unlock the door with your remote, each remote activates the keyless memory settings related to that remote. The drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back of each remote.

Navigation system preferences (see the navigation system manual).

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Keyless memory settings (see page ).

164

97

273

217

Keyless Memory Settings

Keyless Access System

Remote Care

176

DRIVERS ID

TM

10/07/29 12:02:51 31TK4620_181

2011 TL

The engine may not run, and some malfunctions may occur, if the remote is outside the vehicle.

The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Also, the engine may not start if the remote is too close to the windows.

Keyless Access System

Engine Start/Stop Button Operating Range

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

177

Make sure you know where the remote is when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the engine when the remote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remote with you.

10/07/29 12:02:57 31TK4620_182

2011 TL

The keyless access system has four power modes: VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, and START.

This system uses the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to start and stop the engine. If you are carrying the keyless access remote, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed. You can also stop the engine by pushing this button when the vehicle is stopped.

Each time you press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) while carrying the keyless access remote, the power mode switches between VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON.

You can start the engine at any time by pressing the engine start/stop button, while pressing the brake pedal, with the shift lever in Park or neutral position.

You can start the engine at any time by pressing the engine start/stop

button, while pressing the clutch pedal fully, with the shift lever in any gear position.

To change the power mode without turning on the engine, press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission). The power mode will be changed as shown on the next page.

Automatic transmission:

Manual transmission:

Keyless Access System

Engine Start/ Stop Button

Switching the Power Modes

Changing the Power Mode without Starting the Engine

178

10/07/29 12:03:04 31TK4620_183

Operation

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission

179

: Press the engine start/stop button.

: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.

: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.

Do the following without pressing the brake pedal.

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off.

ACCESSORY Indicator in the button comes on green. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

ON Indicator in the button remains green when the engine is not running. (If the engine is running,this indicator is off.) All electrical components can be used.

: Press the engine start/stop button without pressing the clutch pedal.

10/07/29 12:03:12 31TK4620_184

2011 TL

Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission How the mode is switched depends on if the shift lever is in Park or not.

Each time you press the engine start/stop button without pressing the clutch pedal, the power mode switches between VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON modes. To change the mode from ON to ACCESSORY, or ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), press the engine start/stop button twice.

If the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off, make sure to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access slot to turn on your vehicles power mode. For more information, refer to page .

To remove the keyless access remote from the slot, make sure the power mode is VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

With the shift lever in Park, the power mode changes from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when you push the engine start/stop button.

To change the mode from ON to ACCESSORY with the shift lever position in Park, take your foot off the brake and press the engine start/stop button twice.

To change the mode from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button twice.

189

Keyless Access System

180

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:03:19 31TK4620_185

2011 TL

Engine is turned off and power is shut down.

The steering wheel is locked.

No electrical components can be used.

Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and power is shut down.

The steering wheel is locked.

No electrical components can be used.

Use this position to start the engine.

The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.

Engine is turned off.

Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

Indicator-Green Engine is turned off.

Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

Indicator- Green (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running)

All electrical components can be used.

Normal key position while driving.

All electrical components can be used.

Indicator-Off The mode automatically returns to ON after the engine starts.

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

ACCESSORY ON START

Ignition Switch Position

Power Mode

LOCK (0) ON (II)ACCESSORY (I)

Without Keyless Access System

With Keyless Access System and Engine Start/Stop Button

START (III)

OFFGreen

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

181

10/07/29 12:03:31 31TK4620_186

2011 TL

You can start the engine in any power mode.

To start the engine:

Depress the brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button.

Move the shift lever to Park (P).

After you unlock and open the drivers door, you will see the TO START ENGINE: message on the multi-information display. The TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: message will be shown after three seconds. The display switches between the TO START ENGINE: and TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: messages every three seconds.

Apply the parking brake.

Press the clutch pedal down all the way. The engine does not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed.

Press the engine start/stop button. 1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Automatic Transmission

Manual Transmission

Keyless Access System

Starting the Engine Starting Guidance

182

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

BRAKE PEDAL

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH PEDAL

M/T

TO START ENGINE:

TO TURN ACCESSORY ON:

A/T

10/07/29 12:03:44 31TK4620_187

2011 TL

After entering the vehicle, insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).

If the keyless access remote battery dies, you may have to use the built-in key to unlock/lock the vehicle. The built-in key is stored inside the keyless access remote (see

).

If the steering wheel is locked, the engine cannot start. The multi- information display shows you the above message and the indicator in the engine start/stop button blinks. To unlock the steering wheel, apply force by turning it left and right while pressing the engine start/stop button at the same time.

the multi- information display shows the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message, then the TO START ENGINE: message will be shown after you insert the remote into the slot. Each time you press the engine start/stop button, the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display if the remote is not in the slot.

195

191

When the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off,

To unlock the steering wheel

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

183

NOTE:

TO UNLOCK WHEEL

10/07/29 12:03:50 31TK4620_188

page

2011 TL

To turn the vehicle off, make sure the vehicle is completely stopped and do the following.

If the shift lever is in any gear other than neutral, depress the clutch pedal, then press the engine start/stop button.

The engine stops and the power mode switches from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is off. You can verify if the power is off by checking the engine start/stop button LED indicator. You can only place the vehicle in the

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if the transmission is in Park. You will see the SHIFT TO PARK message on the multi-information display if you press the engine start/stop button to turn the vehicle off with the shift lever in any other position except for P (Park).

If the shift lever is in neutral, press the engine start/stop button.

Press the engine start/stop button with your foot on the brake pedal.

Shift to park (P). Make sure to press the brake pedal or set the parking brake before turning off the engine. If your foot is OFF the clutch pedal in any gear position, pressing the engine start/ stop button turns off the engine, and the vehicle may move forward or backward.

1. 2.

Manual Transmission

Automatic Transmission

On automatic transmission models

On manual transmission models

Stopping the Engine

Keyless Access System

Operation Guidance

184

SHIFT TO PARK

A/T model onlyA/T model

10/07/29 12:04:01 31TK4620_189

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If the power mode is in ACCESSORY, you may see the ACCESSORY MODE message on the multi- information display.

After the drivers door is opened, you will see the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi- information display. Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

If you open the drivers door in the ACCESSORY mode, a beeper will sound. You will also see a ACCESSORY MODE or TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi-information display.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

All models

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

185

TO TURN VEHICLE OFFACCESSORY MODE

10/07/29 12:04:08 31TK4620_190

2011 TL

The engine start/stop button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for three seconds. Firmly press the engine start/stop button three times.

Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.

If you are driving, the power mode switches from ON to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) whenever you perform either procedure. However, the steering wheel will NOT lock.

If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button once when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in Park (automatic transmission), do either emergency engine stop procedure. In this case, the power mode will change to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), however, the steering wheel may NOT lock.

Keyless Access System

Emergency Engine Stop

186

10/07/29 12:04:14 31TK4620_191

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If you take the keyless access remote out of the vehicle and close the door with the power mode ON or ACCESSORY, the inside and outside beepers sound and a KEYLESS REMOTE NOT DETECTED message will be displayed on the multi-information display, and the doors will not lock.

The displayed message goes away when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle.

If the engine is running and you take the remote out of the vehicle, it will continue to run, and the inside and outside beepers will sound. Once the power mode is changed to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), the engine will not restart until you bring back a remote into the vehicle.

Even when the remote is inside the vehicle, the beeper may sound when the location of the remote is not detected due to surrounding conditions. It is not a failure. Make sure that you carry the remote with you.

The engine does not start if you push the engine start/stop button when the remote is outside the vehicle. Check where the remote is. Make sure that the remote is in the vehicle with you when you operate the engine start/stop button.

The outside beeper sounds when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, and a door is opened, then closed.

Keyless Access System

Keyless Remote Not Detected Beeper and Message

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

187

10/07/29 12:04:22 31TK4620_192

2011 TL

The battery in the remote normally lasts about 2 years. To ensure maximum battery life, do not store the remote close to electrical devices such as computers or TVs. When the multi-information display shows CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTE BATTERY, replace the battery as soon as possible (see page ).

If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled, you should insert the remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine. After inserting the remote to the slot, operate the engine start/stop button as previously described (see pages

and ). For more information on the keyless access slot, see

.

Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. You should replace the battery as soon as possible.

175

178 182

Keyless Access System

Keyless Remote Low Battery

188

10/07/29 12:04:27 31TK4620_193

page 191

2011 TL

This switch is in the glove box. You can cancel the keyless access system features, which are locking/ unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk, and starting the engine while carrying the keyless access remote. To cancel the system, turn the keyless access system main switch off by pushing it down.

Turning off the keyless access system will disable lockout prevention.

With the keyless access remote system main switch off, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot to start the engine. For more information, see page .

According to the message on the multi-information display, this indicator has two indications. A CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless access system. A CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless starting system.

This indicator normally comes on for several seconds when you change the power mode to ON.

191

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Keyless Access Remote System

Keyless Access System Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

189

NOTE:

OFF

MAIN SWITCH

10/07/29 12:04:35 31TK4620_194

Main Switch

2011 TL

Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on after the engine has started.

In this case, use the built-in key to lock/unlock the doors and insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).

Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM.

The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on and stays on in any power mode.

191

Check Keyless Access System Check Keyless Starting System

Keyless Access System

190

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

A/T model is shown. A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 12:04:44 31TK4620_195

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM.

2011 TL

In this case, you should not shut off your engine until you are in a safe location or at your dealer, as your vehicle may not restart.

If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to off.

In the following two cases, you have to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine:

To remove the keyless access remote, place the vehicle in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, then pull out the keyless access remote.

If the keyless access remote has been inserted into the slot with the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box turned off, it will lock into place when the power is on. The slot will unlock when the power is turned off.

If the keyless access remote does not come out of the slot easily, try to push it in before pulling it out. Make sure the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Keyless Access Remote Slot

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

191

NOTE:

SLOT

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE

10/07/29 12:04:53 31TK4620_196

2011 TL

To insert the keyless access remote:

On all models

On automatic transmission models

On manual transmission models

When you open the drivers door, and each time you press the engine start/stop button, you will see the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message on the multi- information display in the following situations:

When the keyless access system main switch (see page ) is off.

The multi-information display shows the ACCESSORY MODE or TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message to remind you to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

The multi-information display shows the ACCESSORY MODE message to remind you that the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

To avoid damaging the slot, do not insert any other objects into the slot or put a sticker on the keyless access remote.

Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. If necessary, you should replace the battery as soon as possible.

When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to ON, the remote remains unlocked when you insert it into the keyless access remote slot and the power mode is turned on.

189

Keyless Access System

Operation GuidanceUnlocked Keyless Access Remote

192

10/07/29 12:05:01 31TK4620_197

When the keyless access remote is not in the vehicle.

2011 TL

CONTINUED

The message reminds you that the keyless access remote is locked in the keyless access remote slot, and that the power mode is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. To remove the keyless access remote, turn the power mode off by pressing the engine start/stop button twice (in ACCESSORY mode) or once (in ON mode) without pressing the brake pedal.

When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to ON, the multi-information display will show the TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message after you shift to Park.

To unlock the keyless access remote: On automatic transmission models

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

193

10/07/29 12:05:07 31TK4620_198

In ACCESSORY mode, the ACCESSORY MODE message will be displayed a few seconds after the TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFF POWER message is displayed.

2011 TL

The shift lever must be in Park before you can press the engine start/stop button twice without pressing the brake pedal to set the vehicle into the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.

If the vehicle is left in the ACCESSORY mode, the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF message is shown on the multi-information display when you open the drivers door. If the vehicle is left in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode with the keyless access remote in the slot, the REMOVE KEYLESS REMOTE FROM SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display.

To remove the keyless access remote: On automatic transmission models

Keyless Access System

194

10/07/29 12:05:13 31TK4620_199

2011 TL

The trunk and glove box cannot be opened when you turn the trunk main switch off and lock the glove box and trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key. Then, the trunk cannot be opened by using the remote or the exterior trunk release switch.

Remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key.

To avoid damaging the remote and the built-in key, never pull on the built-in key unless you are pressing the release button.

The keyless access system uses an electric field to identify the remote.

If you use medical equipment such as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your doctor if the electric field used by the remote will affect it.

The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors and the trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while pressing the release button. To reinstall the built-in key, push the key into the remote until it clicks.

Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

195

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

10/07/29 12:05:21 31TK4620_200

2011 TL

Push the right side of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the left side of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. Because of the sensors for the side airbag cutoff system, there is no heater in the passengers seat-back.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters.

:

178 181

Seat Heaters

196

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES HEATERS

Passengers Seat

Drivers Seat

10/07/29 12:05:27 31TK4620_201

2011 TL

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seats temperature drops.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

Seat Heaters Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

197

10/07/29 12:05:32 31TK4620_202

2011 TL

To open either front window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.

To close either front window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to raise or lower any window. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. Release the switch when you want the window to stop. Pull back on the switch and hold it to close the window.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

AUTO

Power Windows

198

DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH FRONT PASSENGERS WINDOW SWITCH

INDICATOR

Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

10/07/29 12:05:38 31TK4620_203

2011 TL

If either front window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.

The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

When you push the main switch in, the indicator comes on and the passengers windows cannot be raised or lowered. Use the main switch when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally. To cancel this feature, push on the switch again. The switch will pop out and the indicator will go off.

The windows and the main switch will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch (set VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system). Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

199

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:05:43 31TK4620_204

2011 TL

You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the key in the drivers door lock.

To open: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.

Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. The remaining doors unlock, and all four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.

To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again (within 10 seconds of step 1) and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote transmitter.You can open all of the windows and

the moonroof from outside with the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system).

Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the drivers door.

1.

2.

3.

1.

Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter/Keyless Access Remote

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key or the Built-in key

Power Windows

200

Close

Close

Open

Open

Vehicle without keyless access system

Vehicle with keyless access system

Vehicle without keyless access system

Vehicle with keyless access system

UNLOCK BUTTONUNLOCK BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

10/07/29 12:05:53 31TK4620_205

2011 TL

To close: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.

Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

To close the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

Turn the key clockwise, then release it.

Turn the key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

To open the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

201

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:06:00 31TK4620_206

2011 TL

To close the moonroof fully, firmly push the moonroof switch forward, then release it. The moonroof automatically closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly, then release it. The moonroof automatically opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening, push the switch briefly.

The moonroof can be tilted up in the back for ventilation, or it can be slid back into the roof. Use the switch on the front ceiling to operate the moonroof. You must turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to operate the moonroof.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

To open the moonroof, pull back on the switch and hold it. Release the switch when the moonroof reaches the desired position. To close the moonroof, push the switch forward and hold it. Release the switch to stop the operation.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on the center of the moonroof switch. To stop the moonroof from tilting up fully, push the switch briefly.

:

179 181

AUTO

Moonroof

202

Open

Tilt

Close

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

10/07/29 12:06:08 31TK4620_207

2011 TL

To open or close the moonroof partially, lightly pull the switch back or push it forward and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.

If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.

You can open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch, on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function.

You can use the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote or the key/ built-in key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page

for details.200

Auto Reverse

Moonroof Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

203

If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.

10/07/29 12:06:15 31TK4620_208

2011 TL

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up fully. To release it, pull up slightly, push the button, and lower the lever. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page ).

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).

65

65

Parking Brake

204

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on.

10/07/29 12:06:19 31TK4620_209

2011 TL

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

205

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SIDE POCKET

SUN VISOR

VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

REAR DOOR POCKET

USB ADAPTER CABLE

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

COAT HOOK

FRONT DOOR POCKET with BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CARGO HOOKS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR SEAT ARMREST

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

10/07/29 12:06:24 31TK4620_210

2011 TL

Open the front beverage holder by sliding its cover backward.

To open the rear beverage holder, pull out the lid by the tab. To close it, push it down.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Liquid can also spill from the front door pocket beverage holders when you open or close the doors. Use only resealable containers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

206

FRONT REAR

10/07/29 12:06:30 31TK4620_211

2011 TL

Your vehicle has two accessory power sockets. One is next to the shift lever. The other is in the console compartment.

To access the front accessory socket, slide the lid forward until it latches. To close it, push in on the lid to slide it backward.

To use an accessory power socket, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

Each socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).

None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

Make sure to put the socket cover back in place to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the socket.

:

178

Accessory Power Sockets

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

207

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Slide the lid forward.

Pull up the lid. FRONT

10/07/29 12:06:39 31TK4620_212

and 181 .

2011 TL

To open the console compartment, push in on the lever and lift the armrest. To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.

Make sure to slide back the tray before opening the console compartment.

Open the glove box by pulling out the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key on models with keyless access system.

The glove box light comes on only when the parking lights are on.

Console CompartmentGlove Box

Interior Convenience Items

208

GLOVE BOX

To lock

An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

10/07/29 12:06:46 31TK4620_213

2011 TL

To use a sun visor, pull it down. You can also use a sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip, and swing the sun visor toward the side window. You can extend the sun visor further by pulling it back.

To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come on when you pull up the cover.

You can put small items in the sliding tray located in the console compartment lid. To use the tray, push it in to open it, then slide out fully. Make sure to slide back the tray firmly until you hear a click when not in use.

CONTINUED

Sun VisorVanity Mirror

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

209

SUN VISOR

Slide

10/07/29 12:06:54 31TK4620_214

2011 TL

Do not use the sun visor extension feature over the rearview mirror.

Make sure to slide the sun visor back to its original position before flipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.

To open the sunglasses holder, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving.

To open the center pocket, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing up. To close it, push the lid down until it latches.

Center Pocket Sunglasses Holder

Interior Convenience Items

210

Push

Push

10/07/29 12:07:01 31TK4620_215

2011 TL

Some larger styles of sunglasses may not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items in this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving.

To use a coat hook, slide it out slightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled up when you are not using it. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

Your vehicle has the light control buttons on the front ceiling. With these buttons, you can select three positions: OFF, Door (door activated position), and ON. To select a position, press the appropriate button.

When you press the DOOR button, the green indicator in the button comes on as a reminder.

CONTINUED

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

Coat Hook Light Control Buttons

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

211

COAT HOOK

ON

FRONT

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

10/08/03 20:53:50 31TK4620_216

2011 TL

To turn off the setting, press the OFF button.

The front individual map lights can be turned on and off by pressing each map light button ( / ).

The rear individual map lights cannot be turned on.

The individual map lights in the front and rear come on when any door is opened, when the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system) is used to unlock the doors. When the doors are closed, each light can be turned on and off by pushing the map light button ( / ).

After all doors are closed tightly, the lights dim slightly, then fade out in about 30 seconds.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting, see

.

With any door left open, the lights stay on about 15 minutes, then go out.

The lights also come on when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The lights also come on when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

All the individual map lights come on and stay on.

OFF position:

Door (Door activated position):

ON position:

On models with keyless access system

Interior Lights

212

MAP LIGHT BUTTON FRONT

REAR

10/07/29 12:07:24 31TK4620_217

page 117

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

Turn on the front individual map lights by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off. When the door activated position is selected with the light control button, the rear map lights can be turned on by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off.

If any map light is left on when the ignition switch is turned off or the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set, and all doors are closed, it will turn off when the vehicle is locked with the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system), or after 15 minutes.

The courtesy lights come on when the parking lights are turned on. To

adjust its brightness, press either of the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

CONTINUED

Interior Lights

Individual Map Lights

Courtesy Lights

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

213

COURTESY LIGHTS

FRONT

REAR

10/07/29 12:07:33 31TK4620_218

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

2011 TL

The courtesy light in each front door comes on when the door is opened, and goes out when the door is closed.

In addition to the courtesy light on the ceiling, the drivers ambient foot light comes on.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch. This light comes on when you open the drivers door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed.

Your vehicle has a keyless access remote slot light. The light comes on when you:

Open any door.

Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Remove the keyless access remote from the keyless access remote slot.

After all doors are closed tightly, the light dims slightly, then fades out in about 30 seconds (depending on the interior light dimming timer setting). The light turns off before 30 seconds have elapsed if you lock the drivers door.

Interior Lights

Keyless Access Remote Slot Light

214

LIGHTS

10/07/29 12:07:42 31TK4620_219

On models with keyless access system

On models without keyless access system

2011 TL

The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those feature and how to use them.

The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.

The security system helps to

your vehicle.

...............Climate Control System . 216 Using Automatic Climate

...................................Control . 218 Dual Temperature and Mode

...................................Control . 222

..........Climate Control Sensors . 224 ................................Audio System . 225

................................Audio System . 226 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 227

................Playing the XM Radio . 235 .................................Playing Discs . 241

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 251 ............................Playing an iPod . 252

.................iPod Error Messages . 259 Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 260 USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 268 .............Audio System . 269

................................Audio System . 273 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 274

................Playing the XM Radio . 287 ................................Playing a Disc . 295

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 307 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)

..........................................Audio . 308 ............................Playing an iPod . 338

.................iPod Error Messages . 346 Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 347 USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 358 .............Audio System . 359

..................Protecting Your Discs . 364 ............AM/FM Radio Reception . 368

................Remote Audio Controls . 370 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 372

.................Radio Theft Protection . 373 ..........................Setting the Clock . 374

............................Security System . 377 .........................................Compass . 379

...............................Cruise Control . 383 HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 386 HandsFreeLink

(Models without navigation ..................................system) . 389

HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation

..................................system) . 406 ..AcuraLink (U.S. models only) . 425 ...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 441

Models without navigation system

Bluetooth

Models with navigation system

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Features F

eatures

215

10/07/29 12:07:48 31TK4620_220

discourage vandalism and theft of

2011 TL

Climate Control System

216

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

DISPLAY PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAYDRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

Models without navigation system

DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

10/07/29 12:07:54 31TK4620_221

2011 TL

Climate Control System F

eatures

217

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

DRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON

Models with navigation system

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 12:07:59 31TK4620_222

2011 TL

On models with navigation system The automatic climate control system in your vehicle picks the proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to maintain the interior temperature you select, and to remove moisture from the air and make the interior dry. The system also adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels.

The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. The system also dehumidifies the interior.

The drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature can be set separately. Push up the switch of the appropriate temperature control to increase the temperature of airflow. Push down the switch to decrease it. Each set temperature is shown in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).Set the desired temperature with

the temperature control switch. You can set the drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature separately.

Press the Drivers or Passengers AUTO button. You will see AUTO and the selected temperature on the appropriate side of the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

The climate control system for your vehicle can also be operated using the voice control system. See the navigation system manual for complete details.

When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with navigation system), the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the climate control settings are turned to the respective mode automatically with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON.

1.

2.

Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Personalization Setting

Climate Control System

Temperature Control

218

10/07/29 12:08:08 31TK4620_223

2011 TL

When you set the temperature to its lower limit ( ) or its upper limit ( ), the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely off for short periods only.

To turn the system completely off, press the ON/OFF button.

Each time you press this button, the climate control system switches between on and off. Turning on the system with this button selects your last climate control selection.

You can also select the appropriate mode on the drivers side and the passengers side separately. To change a mode, press and release the appropriate side mode control button. This will take the mode control out of AUTO mode.

In AUTO mode, the vehicles interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and front passenger according to each adjusted temperature. The system also regulates each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the suns

position which is updated automatically by the navigations global positioning system (GPS). If one side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system lowers the temperature only on that side.

When you press this button, the indicator in the button comes on, and the passengers side temperature and mode control is synchronized to the drivers side set temperature and mode control. Changing the passengers side temperature or mode control makes the indicator go off and takes the system out of SYNC mode.On models with navigation system

Climate Control System

To Turn Everything Off

ON/OFF Button

SYNC Button F eatures

219

10/07/29 12:08:17 31TK4620_224

2011 TL

When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicles interior is sent through the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.

The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.

You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word AUTO in the display to go out. When you turn the A/C off, the

system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.

This button turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

Press the button to increase the fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) ButtonSemi-automatic Operation

Fan Control

Climate Control System

220

10/07/29 12:08:28 31TK4620_225

2011 TL

Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.

This button directs the main airflow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any mode selection you may have made.

Air flows from the floor vents.This button turns the rear window

defogger on and off (see page ).

The drivers side mode and the passengers side mode can be selected separately. Use the appropriate mode control button to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided between the floor and corner vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield.

This mode can only be selected from the drivers side, however the passengers side controls can still change the temperature.

When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. For faster defrosting, the fan speed automatically increases. You can also increase airflow to the windshield by closing the corner vents on the dashboard. To close the vents,

When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings.

Select to help clear the rear window.

Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the back of the center console, and the floor vents.

Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard, and the vents on the back of the center console.

Each time you press the mode control button, the display shows the mode selected.

139

CONTINUED

Rear Window Defogger Button Windshield Defroster Button

Mode Controls

Climate Control System F

eatures

221

10/07/29 12:08:41 31TK4620_226

rotate the wheel on the side of each corner vent.

2011 TL

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

When the indicator in the button is on, the SYNC

indicator also comes on. The front passengers temperature cannot be set separately from the drivers.

Your vehicle has two temperature control switches and two mode control buttons, one for the driver, and one for the front passenger.

The drivers side and the passengers side temperature and mode can be controlled independently.

Climate Control System

Dual Temperature

222

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

U.S. model with navigation system is shown.

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON PASSENGERS

SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

10/07/29 12:08:47 31TK4620_227

and Mode Control

2011 TL

The selected temperatures and mode appear in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system). When the indicator in the SYNC button is on, you can adjust both sides to the same temperature and mode by pushing the drivers side temperature and mode controls.

When you set the temperature to its upper or lower limit, it is displayed as

or .

Synchronized Control

Climate Control System F

eatures

223

Passengers SideDrivers Side

REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS

10/07/29 12:08:52 31TK4620_228

2011 TL

The climate control system has two sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of the dashboard, and a temperature and humidity sensor next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.

The humidity sensor helps reduce window fogging and also monitors and adjusts cabin humidity by automatically changing the mode

The airflow from the rear vents can be adjusted when either AUTO mode (driver or passenger) is selected or the fan mode is in the

or position.

You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the tab on each vent up-and-down and side-to-side. You can also open or close the vents with the dial between them.

Climate Control System

Climate Control SensorsRear Ventilation

224

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR

10/07/29 12:08:59 31TK4620_229

to Defrost.

2011 TL

An audio system is standard on all models. Read the appropriate pages (as shown below) to use your vehicles audio system.

For vehicles without navigation system, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system, see pages through .

226 272

273 363

Audio System F

eatures

225

Models Without navigation system Models With navigation system

10/07/29 12:09:06 31TK4620_230

2011 TL

Most audio system functions can be controlled by standard buttons, bars, and knobs. In addition, you can access some functions by using the selector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to scroll through lists, or to make selections or adjustments to a list

make a selection, push the center

When the audio system is in XM Radio mode or playing discs, pushing the selector (ENTER) knob switches the display between the normal display and the extended display. The extended display has three segments to display the detailed information.

To select any setting such as the clock or sound adjustment, press the SETUP button. To use any audio system function, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You can select the item by turning the selector knob. To go back to the previous display, press the RETURN button.

Pressing the SETUP button again will also cancel the setup display mode.

When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter and turn the audio system on with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

233

Selector Knob SETUP Display

Personalization Setting

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

226

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

SETUP BUTTON

10/07/29 12:09:14 31TK4620_231

or menu item on the display. When

of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

2011 TL

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

227

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS AM/FM BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

(SOUND) BUTTON SETUP BUTTON

10/07/29 12:09:20 31TK4620_232

2011 TL

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the VOL/ (power/volume) knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/

knob.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are displayed. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page 230.

Use the selector knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Turn the knob right to tune to a higher frequency, or left to tune to a lower frequency.

The skip function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press and hold the or side of the SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then release it.

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. When the system finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SKIP

SCAN

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

228

10/07/29 12:09:30 31TK4620_233

2011 TL

Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

You will see a 0 displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for that preset button.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described.

, press the A. SEL (auto select) button.

For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see

.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. A-SEL flashes in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off auto select

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Preset AUTO SELECT

F eatures

229

10/07/29 12:09:38 31TK4620_234

page 368

This restores the presets you originally set.

2011 TL

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name provided by the radio data system (RDS).

To switch the function between on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the display shows the station name.

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the display continues to show the frequency with the RDS information display function on.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the display shows RDS NAME OFF.

The RDS information display function shows the name of the RDS station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

230

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

10/07/29 12:09:45 31TK4620_235

2011 TL

On the FM band selected, you can select the program category provided by the RDS. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music

COUNTRY: Country music SOFT: Adult hits and soft music TOP 40: Top 40 hits OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues

RELIGION: Programs concerned with religion

CLASSIC: Classical music JAZZ: Jazz INFO: News, information, sports, talk shows, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather

This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When the system finds a station, the selected RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds.

ALL: All RDS category stations

Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select an RDS category. The display shows the selected RDS category name for about 10 seconds. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations in the selected RDS category. If you do

nothing while the RDS category name is displayed, the selected category is canceled.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

RDS Program Search

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

231

RDS CATEGORY

10/07/29 12:09:58 31TK4620_236

2011 TL

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When it finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

You can use the RDS program search or scan function even if the RDS information display function

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

RDS Program SCAN

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

232

10/07/29 12:10:04 31TK4620_237

is off.

2011 TL

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to- side strength of the sound.

Press the SETUP button to display the sound settings. Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate setting: BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer), CENTER, Dolby PL (Prologic) II, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation). Press the selector (ENTER) knob to enter the setting, then turn the selector knob to adjust the setting.

Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only be activated when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio, and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, PL II is shown in the audio display.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9 (maximum front level), the subwoofer is turned off.

CONTINUED

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound

SUBW

CENTER

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

233

Selector knob adjustable direction is shown.

FADER is selectable.

SUBWOOFER is selectable.

10/07/29 12:10:16 31TK4620_238

2011 TL

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off.

Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the display.

To return to normal play, push the RETURN or SETUP button after you stop adjusting a mode.

137

Except SVC adjustment

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Audio System LightingSVC Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)

234

10/07/29 12:10:23 31TK4620_239

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

235

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

SELECTOR KNOB

XM RADIO BUTTON

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

10/07/29 12:10:28 31TK4620_240

2011 TL

To listen to XM Radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

To switch between channel mode and category mode, press and hold the TITLE button until the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category.

Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the display changes in the following sequence: name, title, and category.

You can also change the mode from the menu items. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/ CHANNEL and press the selector knob (ENTER). Each time you press and release the selector knob (ENTER), the display changes between CHANNEL and CATEGORY. To enter the setting, press the TITLE button.

You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display.

Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

236

10/07/29 12:10:36 31TK4620_241

2011 TL

The SCAN function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the stations within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the button again.

You can also select a channel or category from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a channel or category. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select another category.

Turn the selector knob to change channel selections. Turn the knob right for higher numbered channels and left for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

CONTINUED

SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )TUNE

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

237

Channel list is shown.

10/07/29 12:10:43 31TK4620_242

2011 TL

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel: Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the selector knob, or the CATEGORY bar or SCAN button to tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

Once a channel is stored, simply press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Press the button again. The other XM band will show. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

The selected channel has no artist or title information at this time.

There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

XM is loading the audio or program information.

The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages - - - -

NO SIGNAL

UPDATING

NO INFO

ANTENNA

LOADING

OFF AIR

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

238

10/07/29 12:10:55 31TK4620_243

2011 TL

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road. Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

When DPLII is turned on (see page ), sound coming from the rear

speakers may be distorted due to the compression of the music being broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this happens.

233

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

239

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

10/07/29 12:11:04 31TK4620_244

2011 TL

Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.

If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at

, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact XM CANADA at , or at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn the selector knob until CH 000 appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After youve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CATEGORY or CHANNEL will appear in the display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM CANADA .

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Receiving XM Radio Service

240

10/07/29 12:11:12 31TK4620_245

2011 TL

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

241

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

DISC EJECT BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:11:18 31TK4620_246

2011 TL

You operate the disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc changer, press the CD button. You will see CD in the display. The disc and track numbers, and the elapsed time are shown in the display. You can also select the displayed information with the TITLE button (see page ). The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

To load or play discs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

A disc compressed in AAC format cannot be played in this audio system.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work in this unit.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA format. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see MP3 in the display. In WMA format, WMA will appear in the display. The disc, folder and track numbers are displayed. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.

244

To Play a Disc

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

242

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

10/07/29 12:11:25 31TK4620_247

2011 TL

Your vehicles in-dash disc changer holds up to six discs.

To load more than one disc, press the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see LOAD in the display. To load only one disc, press and release the LOAD button.

The disc number for an empty position begins blinking.

When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears in the display again, insert the next disc in the slot. Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, the system begins playing the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into an empty position while a disc is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. The system stops playing the current disc and starts the loading sequence. It then plays the disc just loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this unit.

Insert the disc into the disc slot when the green disc load indicator comes on. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see DISC READ in the display while the disc load indicator turns red and blinks as the disc is loaded.

If a file on a WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to the next file.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Loading Discs

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

243

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:11:33 31TK4620_248

2011 TL

Each time you press the TITLE button, the display shows you the text, if the disc was recorded with text data.

The display shows up to 16 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.). When a new folder, file, or track is

selected.

When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in MP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play.

You will also see some text data under these conditions:

When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name.

When you turn on the audio system next time, the system keeps your selection with the TITLE button.When you press and release the

TITLE button while a disc without text data is playing, you will see NO INFO on the display.

With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display. The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name.

You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the artist, album, and track tag.

If you select name off, the text display is turned off.

If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown. You can see up to 32 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the TITLE button again, the display shows the first 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it is replaced with . (dot) in the display. When the disc has no text data, you will see NO INFO on the display.

Text Data Display Function

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

244

10/07/29 12:11:43 31TK4620_249

2011 TL

Use the SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3 or

In MP3 or WMA mode, use the CATEGORY bar to select folders on the disc and use either side of the SKIP bar to change files.

To select a different disc, use the appropriate preset buttons (1 through 6). If you select an empty position, the system will go into the loading sequence (see page ).

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also select a folder or track/file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a folder. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to change the display to the track/file list, then turn the same knob to select a track/file. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track or file, press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

243

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

245

Folder Selection

Track Selection Press ENTER.

10/07/29 12:11:53 31TK4620_250

WMA mode).

2011 TL

In MP3 or WMA mode To

select a different folder, press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to move to the beginning of the next folder. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

FOLDER SELECTION To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

246

MENU ITEMS

10/07/29 12:11:59 31TK4620_251

2011 TL

To cancel the selected repeat, random, or scan mode, press the SETUP button to show PLAY MODE, then press the selector knob (ENTER). When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

To continuously replay a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), select REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu items. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn

This feature continuously replays the current disc. To activate disc repeat, select REPEAT DISC from the menu items. You will see D-REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn

This feature, when activated, plays the files within the current folder in random order, rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder random play, select RANDOM IN FLD from the menu items. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random play by selecting normal play, or you select a different folder with the CATEGORY bar.

This feature, when activated, replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder repeat mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD from the menu items. You will see F-REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Select normal play to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the repeat feature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off the repeat feature.

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

REPEAT ONE TRK REPEAT DISC

RANDOM IN FLD

REPEAT ONE FLD

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

247

PLAY MODE ITEMS

10/07/29 12:12:07 31TK4620_252

it off. it off.

2011 TL

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, select RANDOM IN DISC from the menu items. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to return to normal play.

The SCAN function samples all the tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc (all files in the selected folder in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/file in the disc/folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track sampled.

This function samples the first file in each folder on the disc in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

246 246

In MP3 or WMA modeRANDOM IN DISC SCAN TRK SCAN FLD

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

248

10/07/29 12:12:12 31TK4620_253

2011 TL

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar, or selecting a different disc (using the preset buttons) or folder (using the CATEGORY bar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.

This feature, when activated, samples the first track on each disc in order (the first file in the main folder on each disc in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the disc scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly until D-SCAN shows in the display. The system will then play the first track/ file in the first main folder on the first disc for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the following first track/file for 10 seconds each. When it plays a track/ file that you want to continue listening to, press and hold the SCAN button again.

When the first track on the last disc, or the first file in the last main folder on the last disc begins to play, the disc scan mode will be canceled. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from scan, disc scan, then to normal play.

Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from file scan, folder scan, disc scan, then to normal play.

You can also select the disc scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

Press the eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload the disc after 10 seconds and begin playing.

To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button until the first disc begins to eject.

You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM/FM or

button. Press the AUX button to switch to an appropriate audio unit (if it is connected to the auxiliary input jack or the USB adapter cable). Press the CD button again to switch back to the disc changer.246

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

SCAN DISC

To Stop Playing a Disc

F eatures

249

10/07/29 12:12:21 31TK4620_254

2011 TL

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

To remove the disc currently in play, press the eject button. When a disc is removed from a slot, the system automatically begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position. If you do not remove the disc from the changer within 10 seconds, the disc will reload into the slot. Then the system returns to the previous mode (AM, FM, or XM Radio).

To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it with the appropriate preset button. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button. Continue pressing the eject button to remove all the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first.

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page .364

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

Removing Discs from the In-dash Disc Changer

Protecting Discs

250

10/07/29 12:12:28 31TK4620_255

2011 TL

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

365

High Temperature

Track/File format not supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s). Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 365). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 365).

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

251

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL PUSH

EJECT MECH ERROR

CHECK DISC LOAD BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

CHECK DISC EJECT

10/07/29 12:12:35 31TK4620_256

2011 TL

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

252

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

CD BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:12:39 31TK4620_257

2011 TL

This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will also be charged with the ignition switch in these positions.

The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPod models confirmed to be compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are:

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

CONTINUED

Model iPod classic (80/160 G) iPod classic (120 G) iPod with video (iPod 5th generation) iPod nano iPod nano 2nd generation iPod nano 3rd generation iPod nano 4th generation iPod nano 5th generation iPod touch iPod touch 2nd generation

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

To Play an iPod

F eatures

253

10/08/03 20:53:57 31TK4620_258

2011 TL

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.Pull out the USB connector from

the holder.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.

Do not connect your iPod using a hub.

Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it. 1.

2.

3.

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

Connecting an iPod

254

NOTE: DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

10/07/29 12:12:56 31TK4620_259

2011 TL

You can also select a file from any list on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to an iPod menu, then turn the selector knob to select a desired list. Press ENTER to set your selection.

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at

Each time you press the TITLE button the display mode switches between the album name, the song name, the artist name, or name off (which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.

CONTINUED

www.apple.com/itunes/

To Select a File from iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files

Text Data Display Function

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

SKIP

F eatures

255

Push ENTER.

10/07/29 12:13:06 31TK4620_260

2011 TL

You can select any type of repeat and shuffle mode by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press ENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select a play mode: normal play, shuffle off, shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off, or repeat one track, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.

If you select ALL, all available files on the selected list are played.

The display shows items on the selected list. Turn the selector knob to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

256

PLAY MODE ITEMS

MENU ITEMS

10/07/29 12:13:15 31TK4620_261

2011 TL

This feature plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. You will see SHUFFLE in the display. Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

This feature plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALB SHUF in the display.

Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes a file while keeping the shuffle function.

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.

This feature continuously plays a file. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play or REPEAT OFF to turn it off.

This feature turns off the repeat mode.

This feature turns off either of the shuffle modes (SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE ALBUM).

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

REPEAT ONE TRK

REPEAT OFF

SHUFFLE OFF

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

257

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:13:24 31TK4620_262

2011 TL

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

If you see an error message in the display, see page .

The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the

audio and iPod.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

:

259

Bluetooth

Disconnecting an iPodTo Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

258

10/07/29 12:13:31 31TK4620_263

2011 TL

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

USB ROM Error

Appears when an incompatible device is connected.

No files in iPod

Use of unsupported iPod

Recognition failure of iPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some files in the iPod.

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. See page 253 for specification information on iPods. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system) F

eatures

259

USB ERROR BAD USB DEVICE

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED VER.

CONNECT RETRY

10/08/03 20:54:01 31TK4620_264

2011 TL

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

260

RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

CD BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

CATEGORY BAR

SETUP BUTTON

FILE TYPE INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:13:41 31TK4620_265

2011 TL

This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3, WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing. The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher, and formatted with the FAT file system. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

:

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash Memory Device

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

261

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:13:50 31TK4620_266

2011 TL

Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used, there may be cases where character information does not display properly.

The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

262

Combining a low sampling f requency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.

10/07/29 12:13:56 31TK4620_267

2011 TL

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

When the USB flash memory device is connected, the USB indicator is shown in the display.

Each time you press the TITLE button, the display mode shows you in sequence, the folder name, the file name, the artist name, the album name, the song name, or name off (which turns off the text display).

Pull out the USB connector from the holder.

The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device

Text Data Display Function

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

263

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/07/29 12:14:04 31TK4620_268

2011 TL

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the selector knob to select a folder. Press ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the same knob to select a file. Press ENTER to set your selection.

To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

SKIP

Folder Selection

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

264

Folder Selection

Track Selection Press ENTER.

10/07/29 12:14:12 31TK4620_269

2011 TL

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

265

MENU ITEMS

10/07/29 12:14:20 31TK4620_270

2011 TL

This

feature continuously plays a file. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.

This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

This feature replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are stored. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature.

This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

This feature plays all the files in random order. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

265REPEAT ONE TRK

SCAN TRKREPEAT ONE FLD

RANDOM IN FLD

RANDOM IN DISC

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

266

PLAY MODE ITEMS

10/07/29 12:14:26 31TK4620_271

2011 TL

If you see an error message in the display, see page .

Select normal play to turn either scan feature off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

To change modes, press the AM/ FM or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB or Audio.

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Make sure to follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

265

268

Bluetooth

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages

To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

SCAN FLD

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device

F eatures

267

10/07/29 12:14:35 31TK4620_272

2011 TL

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

CauseError Message Solution

USB ROM Error

Appears when an incompatible device is connected.

Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flash memory device

Use of unsupported USB flash memory device

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Save some MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device.

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. See page 261 for the specification information for the USB flash memory device. If it appears when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

268

USB ERROR BAD USB DEVICE

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

UNPLAYABLE FILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/08/03 20:54:05 31TK4620_273

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

269

SKIP BAR

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON

10/07/29 12:14:44 31TK4620_274

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with a Audio system, which

allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Audio compatible phone. This function is only available on phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles

HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.

Press the AUX button with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The audio display shows the Audio message and mark. Until the phone is recognized, you will see NO CONNECT on the display. This message will go off when the phone is recognized, then the system begins to play.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins

After a device is linked, press the TITLE button to confirm the device name. The name of the device will appear on the audio display.

In some states, provinces, and territories, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

If an iPod, USB flash memory device, or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB, or AUX in the audio display. Push the AUX button again to play audio files from your Audio phone.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 528-7876.

:

389

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.handsfreelink.ca

To Play Audio FilesBluetooth

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

270

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:14:53 31TK4620_275

to play.

2011 TL

In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message.

The phone is not linked to HFL. The phone is not turned on. The phone is not in the vehicle. Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for

Audio, is already connected.

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

Turning the selector knob to the right or left also changes a file.

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily. Press the SETUP button to display the audio settings.

Turn the selector to select RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Repeat to resume play.

The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

Press the SETUP button to display the audio settings. Turn the selector to select a desired sound mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Turn the selector to your liking (see page for more sound setting information).

The skip function may not be available on some phone devices.

231

Bluetooth

CONTINUED

To skip a file

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

271

NOTE: NOTE:

10/07/29 12:15:06 31TK4620_276

2011 TL

If you receive a call when the Audio is playing, press the

HFL Talk button on the steering wheel. The display switches to the HFL mode (see page ).

After ending the call, press the HFL Back button to go back to the

Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Audio will continue to play.

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button: AM/FM,

or CD (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel, or press the mode button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode. If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable, or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the AUX button also changes the mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

390

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To switch to HFL mode To turn off the Bluetooth

272

10/07/29 12:15:15 31TK4620_277

Audio mode

2011 TL

Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.

The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, press ENTER to go to that selection.

The audio system can also be operated by voice control. See the navigation system manual for complete details.

When you unlock the doors with your remote and turn the audio system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

284

Interface Dial Voice Control System

Personalization Setting

Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

273

SELECTOR ENTER

DIAL

10/07/29 12:15:22 31TK4620_278

2011 TL

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

274

INTERFACE DIAL

TITLE BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

(SOUND) BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

10/07/29 12:15:29 31TK4620_279

2011 TL

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the VOL/ knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see

.

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see

.

On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. You can also change bands by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands, STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the center display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.

CONTINUED

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

275

BAND

STEREO INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:15:38 31TK4620_280

page 178

page 278

2011 TL

Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, or the

side to tune to a lower frequency. To tune with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Tune. Then press ENTER on the interface selector, and turn the interface dial to the desired frequency. To exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER on the

interface selector, then push the interface selector up to go back.

The skip (seek) function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar, then release it.

The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN side of the SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Scan, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

TUNE

SKIP (SEEK)

SCAN

276

TUNE

SCAN

10/07/29 12:15:45 31TK4620_281

2011 TL

When the system finds a strong signal, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the bar again.

Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

If you are traveling and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To store a preset memory location:

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

AUTO SELECT

Preset

F eatures

277

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL

10/07/29 12:15:53 31TK4620_282

2011 TL

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select ON, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A.SEL on the center display and the audio control display (if selected), and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.

You can also press the A.SEL side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see A.SEL on the center display or the screen, and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.

You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button (icon).

The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons (icons).

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.

select A.Sel on the audio menu again and turn the interface dial to select A.SEL OFF, or press the A.SEL side of the bar again. This restores the presets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see

.

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name provided by the radio data system (RDS).

The RDS INFO display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

To cancel auto select,

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

278

10/07/29 12:16:01 31TK4620_283

page 368

2011 TL

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the audio screen and the center display continue to show the frequency.

To switch the RDS INFO display function on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the center display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the center display shows RDS INFO OFF.

On the FM band selected, you can select the program type provided by the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to display the radio information on the screen. Push down the interface selector, then turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER to set your selection. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:

If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the audio screen will always display the RDS information.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

279

NOTE:RDS INFO MESSAGE

RDS SEARCH

10/07/29 12:16:09 31TK4620_284

2011 TL

ALL: All RDS category stations

TOP 40: Top 40 hits ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft

rock music OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies JAZZ: Jazz SOFT: Adult hits and soft music R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft

rhythm and blues CLASSIC: Classical music RELIGION: Programs concerned

with religion INFO: News, information, sports,

talk shows, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather

Turn the interface dial to select an RDS category. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations on the selected RDS category by pressing the interface selector to the left or the right. Press ENTER to set your selection. If you do nothing while the RDS category is selected, the selected category is canceled.

You can also select an RDS category with the CATEGORY bar. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display an RDS category in the center display. Select a category by pressing either side of the bar.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

COUNTRY: Country music

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

280

RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

10/07/29 12:16:20 31TK4620_285

2011 TL

This function searches up and down for strong signal frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while searching it.

To activate RDS category search with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or right to select SEEK up, SEEK down, or SCAN in the upper right corner of the screen. Press ENTER to activate the RDS category search (SEEK up/down).

Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

RDS Category Search

F eatures

281

SEEK is selected.

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

RDS CATEGORY LIST

10/07/29 12:16:27 31TK4620_286

2011 TL

To activate RDS category scan with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search on the audio menu. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar again.

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category one by one. To activate it, press and release the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN in the center display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while scanning it. When the system finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

RDS Category SCAN

282

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

SCAN is selected.

10/07/29 12:16:33 31TK4620_287

2011 TL

While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or the right to select SCAN. Then press ENTER to activate the RDS SCAN.

To activate radio text display, use the interface dial. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Read Radio Text. Press ENTER on the interface selector to enter the setting.

This function displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

If the selected RDS station has the radio text information, you will see the text indicator on the screen.

Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.

CONTINUED

Radio Text Display

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

283

TEXT INDICATOR

READ RADIO TEXT

10/07/29 12:16:41 31TK4620_288

2011 TL

To adjust the sound, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to Sound Setup. Then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the mode you want to adjust by turning the interface dial.

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and BALANCE are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II and Speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made with the (Sound) button or the interface dial.

The display shows up to 64 characters on the selected RDS station.

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

284

SOUND SETUP

10/07/29 12:16:48 31TK4620_289

2011 TL

These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.

The system will return to the audio playing mode in the center display about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode.

Turn the VOL/ knob or interface knob to adjust the setting to your liking. You can check the level on the navigation screen or on the center display. When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the center display.

You can also adjust the sound by pushing the (Sound) button repeatedly. Each mode is shown in the center display as you push the button.

If you do not make an adjustment within 10 seconds, you will need to select the mode again.

To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9 (maximum front level), the subwoofer is turned off.

CONTINUED

FADER/BALANCE

BASS/TREBLE

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

285

10/07/29 12:16:57 31TK4620_290

2011 TL

Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.

To adjust the strength of the sound from the subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH. The default setting is MID. To change the SVC mode, select SVC, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the

screen. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only activate when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XM Radio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX,

Audio), and HDD Audio. When ProLogic II is available, PL II is shown in the audio display.

When ProLogic II is not available in the selected audio source, DPL2 N/ A is shown on the center display.

To set this feature on or off, select Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Rotate the interface dial to ON or OFF, and press ENTER.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

In some audio playing modes (XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the music coming from the rear speakers may sound distorted. This is due to compression of the music, and it does not indicate a problem with the setting.

Bluetooth

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)

286

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:17:05 31TK4620_291

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

287

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

PRESET BUTTONS

(SOUND) BUTTONXM RADIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

10/07/29 12:17:11 31TK4620_292

2011 TL

To listen to XM Radio, set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Push the button to select the XM Radio. The last channel you listened to will show in the audio screen (if selected) and the center display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see

.

Each time you push the interface selector up, the band will change to XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO button to display XM information on the screen. You can operate the XM radio system with the interface dial.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a registered business name of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.

Operating the XM Radio

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

288

10/07/29 12:17:18 31TK4620_293

page 178

2011 TL

Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the center display changes in the following sequence: NAME (artist name), TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL NAME (channel name).

On the screen, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number), CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

To switch between the category mode and channel mode, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Mode, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select CH or CAT, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Move the interface selector up to go back.

You can also switch the mode by pressing the TITLE button for

In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.

Press either side of the TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press the side of the bar for higher numbered channels and the side for lower numbered channels. You can also change channels with the interface selector. Push down the interface

selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to choose Tune and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the appropriate direction. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel List and press ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface dial to select a channel, then press ENTER to set your selection.

Press either side of the bar to select another category.

CONTINUED

MODE

TUNE

CHANNEL LIST

CATEGORY ( or )

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

289

10/07/29 12:17:26 31TK4620_294

3 seconds.

2011 TL

The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within

The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the SCAN side of the bar to cancel.

This function samples all channels. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

This function samples the stations in the selected category. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Category Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

SCAN

CHANNEL SCAN

PresetCATEGORY SCAN

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

290

XM BAND

10/07/29 12:17:34 31TK4620_295

that category are scanned. To activate SCAN, press the SCAN

center display.

side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN on the screen and

2011 TL

The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

XM is loading the audio or program information.

The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the preset button until you hear a beep. You can also pick the number with the interface dial. Select your desired number and press and hold ENTER on the interface selector.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Use the tune, list, or scan function to tune to a desired channel.

The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

The selected channel has no artist or title information at this time.

5.

3.

4.

2.

CONTINUED

UPDATING

LOADING

OFF AIR XM Radio Display Messages

NO SIGNAL

- - - -

CHECK ANTENNA

NO INFO

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

291

10/07/29 12:17:44 31TK4620_296

2011 TL

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.

Driving in tunnels. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.

When DPLII is turned on (see page ), sound coming from the rear

speakers may be distorted due to the compression of the music being broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this happens.

286

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

292

GROUND REPEATER

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

10/07/29 12:17:52 31TK4620_297

2011 TL

CONTINUED

To replay and see the stored file, press the AUDIO button to select the audio display on the navigation screen.

Push down the interface selector to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Note, then press ENTER.

This function stores the sound content played on the selected XM Radio station with the channel, category, name, and title information.

To activate this function, press and hold the button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing. You can record for up to 10 seconds. To stop recording, press the AM/ FM button or button.

Once you store the recorded sound file, you can replay it and confirm the information. The system can store up to 30 sound files. If you continue to store more files, the oldest one will be deleted each time you add a new file.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

U.S. models only

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Note Function

F eatures

293

NOTE ICON

10/07/29 12:18:02 31TK4620_298

2011 TL

Turn the selector dial to select a sound file, then press ENTER. The display shows the category, name and title information of the selected file.

To delete all files, push the interface selector to the left to select DELETE ALL, then press ENTER. To delete one file, select the file you want to delete and push the interface selector to the right, then press ENTER.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see

.

If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at

, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact XM CANADA at , or at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the

side of the TUNE bar until 0

appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you have registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CAT (category) or CH (channel) will appear in the center display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM CANADA .

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Receiving XM Radio Service

294

SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE

10/07/29 12:18:10 31TK4620_299

page 178

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

295

CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

EJECT BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

DISC BUTTON

DISC SLOT

TITLE BUTTON

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER)KNOB

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

10/07/29 12:18:17 31TK4620_300

2011 TL

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

The disc player can also play MP3, WMA, or AAC format that saved on CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see page ).

If a file on WMA or AAC disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio system skips to the next file.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.

Video CDs and DVD-V format discs will not work in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.

Your vehicles audio system has an in-dash disc player. To operate the disc player, the power mode must be in the ACCESSORY or ON.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see

.

CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT) CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC) DVD-A DVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)

The disc player can play these disc formats:

301

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

296

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:18:27 31TK4620_301

page 178

2011 TL

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.

It is possible to select up to 999 files for inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs, and up to 3,500 files for inclusion in DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.

Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way to play it. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. The number of the current track is shown in the display. When playing a disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the numbers of the current folder and file are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see

.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

To Load a Disc

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

297

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

10/07/29 12:18:34 31TK4620_302

page 364

2011 TL

Select the disc player by pressing the DISC button. The system will begin playing the last selected track in the disc. You will see the current track position highlighted.

Title information will be displayed by a list when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. When you play a CD recorded with text data, you will see the genre, artist name, album and track name on the screen. When you play MP3/WMA/AAC discs, you will see the genre, artist name, album name and track name on the screen. If the disc was not recorded with this information, it will not be displayed.

Each time you press the TITLE button, the center display changes from artist name to album name, to track name and then to normal display that shows the track number and the elapsed time. When playing a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the display mode changes from folder name, to file name, to artist tag, to album tag, to track tag, and then to normal display.

Each time you press and release the side of the skip bar, the player

skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the

side of the skip bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the side again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold either side of the skip bar.

When you insert a CD for the first time, the system automatically starts recording to the hard disc. For information on recording from music CDs, see page .310

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

298

10/07/29 12:18:40 31TK4620_303

2011 TL

You can also choose a track directly from a track list. If there are no track names, you will see No Title displayed. Turn the interface dial to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To Choose a Track Track Repeat

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

299

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICONTRACK LIST

TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:18:48 31TK4620_304

2011 TL

This feature plays the tracks within a disc in random order. When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all the tracks within the disc are played in random order, regardless of the configuration of the folder.

Push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

The scan function samples all tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc.

To activate scan, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, or push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Random Play Track Scan

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

300

TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR

SCAN ICONTRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

10/07/29 12:18:57 31TK4620_305

2011 TL

This audio system plays CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, and DVD-R/RW compressed in MP3, WMA, or AAC formats. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.

To take the system out of disc mode, press the AM/FM button, the

button, or the HDD/AUX button. To return to disc mode, press the DISC button.

Turn the interface dial to select the Scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track on the disc. When you return to disc mode, the disc will begin playing from where it left off.

To turn this feature off, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar again, or turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The system begins to play the last track sampled.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to turn the power mode off, see page .

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or the engine start/stop button, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

: Including Root folder

178

Maximum folders

255

255

Maximum layers

8

8

Maximum Files

999

3500

CONTINUED

Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

301

Disc

CD-ROM CD-R CD-RW DVD-ROM DVD-R DVD-RW

10/07/29 12:19:08 31TK4620_306

2011 TL

Combining a low sampling frequency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.

To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.

While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, you can select a folder within the disc by pressing either side of the category bar. Each time you press either side of the bar, the folder title and its first files information appear on the center display and on the navigation screen in hierarchical order of the folders which contain files within the disc.

If the root folder has some additional folders in the lower layer, they will be listed on the screen.

Using the interface selector, you can see the list of all the folders within a disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/ AAC disc, push the interface selector up. The folder list in the currently playing disc will appear on the screen.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Folders

302

NOTE:

FOLDER LIST

10/07/29 12:19:15 31TK4620_307

2011 TL

Select a desired folder by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER. The display returns to normal play, and the first track in the selected folder begins to play.

To change a file, turn the interface dial to select a desired file, then press ENTER.

This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed. To activate folder repeat play, push

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Folder Repeat

F eatures

303

TRACK LIST

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR

REPEAT OFF ICON

10/07/29 12:19:22 31TK4620_308

the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface interface dial to select the folder repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

2011 TL

This feature, when activated, plays all files in the current folder in random order. To activate folder random play, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

This feature samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate this feature, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You can also select the SCAN icon with the interface dial. Push the selector down, turn the dial to select

Scan on the AUDIO MENU, then press ENTER. Turn the dial to select the scan icon, then press ENTER. The system begins to play a file for about 10 seconds, and continues to sample the remaining files.

To turn this feature off, press the SCAN side of the bar again, or select OFF icon by turning the dial, then press ENTER.

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Folder Random

File Scan

304

FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR

FOLDER SCAN ICON

FILE SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

10/07/29 12:19:30 31TK4620_309

2011 TL

This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar. Or, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format disc, each time you press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, the system changes in the following sequence: Scan Scan first track in folder OFF Scan.

The system plays the first file in the first folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the first files in the next folders for 10 seconds. After playing the first file in the last folder, the system plays normally.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The last track sampled begins to play.

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Folder Scan

F eatures

305

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:19:35 31TK4620_310

2011 TL

To remove the disc, press the eject ( ) button.

If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts playing automatically.

Use the disc controls previously described.

For information on how to handle and protect discs, see page .364

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

Removing a Disc from the Player Playing a DVD-A Disc

Protecting Discs

306

10/07/29 12:19:41 31TK4620_311

2011 TL

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the center display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionCauseError Message

365

Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 365 ). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically.

Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Servo Error

Mechanical Error

FOCUS Error Disc violates copyright Disc not supported

Load Error

Track/File format not supported

High Temperature

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

307

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

PUSH EJECT MECH ERROR

CHECK DISC

CHECK DISC LOAD

UNPLAYABLE FILE

HEAT ERROR

10/07/29 12:19:47 31TK4620_312

2011 TL

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

308

TITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BARCATEGORY BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER)KNOB

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

10/07/29 12:19:52 31TK4620_313

2011 TL

Recording function from following media is not supported. CD-DA which prohibits the copying by SCMS CD-DA with copy control SACD (Super Audio CD) DTS-CD DVD-A CD-R/RW DVD-R/RW Copy controlled CDs (Playback cannot be guaranteed) DTS-CDs (Only enabled for playback)

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function can record tracks from music CDs to the navigation systems hard disc. This function also allows for various playing methods, such as playing recorded tracks on an artist- by-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For example, you can play the tracks that you want to listen to in any order that you like for each playlist.

Music data recorded on HDD can only be used for personal enjoyment.

Data is recorded using ultra- efficient compression technology, therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the original.

Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. See page .

If the HDD is ever replaced, all data will be lost and stored music will not be recovered.

Only recordings from a standard CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo PCM digital sound data) to HDD are supported.

Digital music files, such as MP3, WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R and USB flash memory devices cannot be copied to HDD. Likewise, digital music files recorded to HDD cannot be copied to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.

335

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

309

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:19:59 31TK4620_314

2011 TL

Playlists are track lists in a certain playback group.

This playlist is automatically generated when the music CD is recorded. The maximum number of original playlists that can be stored to the HDD is 999, with 99 songs on each playlist. Each album name on the music CD is counted as a playlist.

Songs that have been recorded on the HDD are categorized in groups for easy searching.

For more information of how to search a music, see page .

There are six categories: Album record date: Album titles are arranged by date of recording. Album: Album names are arranged in alphabetical order. Artist: Artist names are arranged in alphabetical order. Genre: Songs are arranged by genre. Playlist: Any of six playlists that are arranged by the user. Track: Track titles are arranged in alphabetical order.

If you play a music CD that has not yet been recorded on the HDD, the system will automatically begin recording to the HDD once the disc is loaded. To turn this feature off, see page .

The HDD has six playlist folders for user customizing. Each playlist can be edited by the user, and will store up to 999 songs. For more information on how to edit the user playlist, see page .

317

316

312

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Playlists

Original Playlist

User Playlist

Track Search Methods Recording a Music

310

10/07/29 12:20:11 31TK4620_315

CD to HDD Audio

2011 TL

The icons show the recording conditions for each track: Rec icon: Now recording Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded Rec done icon: Recording finished

Please note that there will be no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

During recording, operation of this product may be slower.

If you stop the engine or the power system is turned off while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Tracks from music CDs are recorded at four times the playback speed. You can listen to tracks as they are being recorded.

Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan functions are not available during recording.

You can listen to tracks from other playlists that have already been recorded while recording. Press the HDD/AUX button and switch over to HDD Audio.

With the factory settings, all of the songs on a music CD are automatically recorded.

Recording settings cannot be changed during recording.

If the number of songs in the playlist exceeds 999, the oldest song will be overwritten each time you add a new song.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

311

NOTE:REC DONE ICON

REC READY ICON

REC ICON

10/07/29 12:20:20 31TK4620_316

2011 TL

In order to suspend recording, push the interface selector down, select Cancel Rec to HDD, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To change the setting to manual mode, push the interface selector down on the HDD screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup and press ENTER.

Turn the dial to select Ripping and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select MANUAL and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Push down the interface selector to go back to the audio screen.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

To Cancel Recording a Changing the Recording Settings Recording a Track on a Music CD Manually

312

HDD SETUP

RIPPING ICON

10/07/29 12:20:29 31TK4620_317

Music CD to HDD

2011 TL

Select a track to record from the music CD, push the HDD/AUX button, then push the interface selector down to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Rec to HDD, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To change the setting to automatically record all of the tracks on a music CD, move the interface selector down on the HDD Audio screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface selector to select Ripping, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select AUTO, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To play tracks on HDD, push the HDD/AUX button until the HDD Audio screen appears. Playback will start automatically with the track previously selected.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

To Record a Track Manually Recording All of the Tracks on a Music CD Automatically

Playing Tracks on HDD

F eatures

313

REC TO HDD ICON

10/07/29 12:20:38 31TK4620_318

2011 TL

To change a track or tracklist , press on the Category bar or the Skip bar.

The tracklist has six search mode categories: album, artist, track, playlist, genre, and album record date. Within the selected category, the tracklist will be changed with the category bar.

To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down during track playback.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the repeat icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To fast forward, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar. To

rewind, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar.:

The next tracklist is selected. If you press during the last tracklist, the first tracklist is selected. The previous tracklist is selected. If you press during the first tracklist, the last tracklist is selected.

Category Bar

Skip Bar Returns to the beginning of the song that is being played. Press twice to play, the previous track. If you press this bar during the first song, the last song is selected. The next song is selected. If you press this bar during the last song, the first song is selected.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing a Track/Tracklist Repeat Playback

Fast Forwarding and Rewinding

314

REPEAT ICON

REPEAT OFF ICON

10/07/29 12:20:48 31TK4620_319

2011 TL

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function plays tracks in the current search mode in random order. To activate random play, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the HDD AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Random Playback

F eatures

315

RANDOM OFF ICON

RANDOM ICON

10/07/29 12:20:55 31TK4620_320

2011 TL

This function samples the tracks in the current search mode in the order that they were recorded.

To activate scan, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the scan icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track in the current search mode.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.

The HDD has two types of the playlists: original playlist and user playlist. On the original playlist, the music CD is recorded automatically when it is played. In addition, you can create up to six user playlists on the HDD. In each playlist, you can store a desired music data from the original playlists or music CDs.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Scan Playback Making an User Playlist

316

SCAN OFF ICON SCAN ICON

10/07/29 12:21:02 31TK4620_321

2011 TL

While a track is playing on an Original Playlist or User Playlist Playback screen, turn the interface dial and select the track that you want to add to a User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The track options box is displayed. Select Add to Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Playlist screen, turn the interface dial and select the Playlist to which the song is to be added, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen.

After storing music data, you can customize the original and user playlists (see page ).

While playing music in the HDD playback screen, push the interface selector up to select MUSIC SEARCH. You can search a track by album, artist, track, playlist, genre, or album record date, or you can shuffle all tracks.

1.

2.

3.

322

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Adding a Track to a User Playlist Searching the Music

F eatures

317

10/07/29 12:21:10 31TK4620_322

2011 TL

Shuffles the playback of all tracks that have been recorded on HDD.

To shuffle all tracks, push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and then push the interface selector down. Shuffled playback begins.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Albums. Press ENTER on the selector, and the album list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.

The first track on the selected album begins to play.

SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS

Searching Music by Album

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

318

Push the selector down.

ALPHABET TAG

10/07/29 12:21:19 31TK4620_323

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Artists. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the artist list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

Turn the interface dial to select the artist you want to listen to, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

The first track on the selected artist begins to play.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Tracks. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Searching Music by Artist Searching Music by Track

F eatures

319

10/07/29 12:21:27 31TK4620_324

2011 TL

Turn the interface dial to select a track you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

The selected track begins to play.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Playlists. Press ENTER on the interface selector then the playlist will be displayed.

The first track on the selected playlist begins to play.

Turn the interface dial to select the playlist you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Searching Music by Playlists

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

320

10/07/29 12:21:34 31TK4620_325

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Genres. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the genre list will be displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select the genre you want to listen to, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The first track on the selected genre begins to play.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Album Record Date. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The album list will be displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.

Searching Music by Genre Searching Music by

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

321

RECORDED DATE

10/07/29 12:21:42 31TK4620_326

Album Record Date

2011 TL

The first track on the selected album begins to play.

After storing the data, you can change some items: order of tracks on the user playlist, name of the playlist, track title, artist name, and music genre. You can also add a track to the playlist, and delete the track or the album from the playlist.

While playing back an Original Playlist or User Playlist that you want to add to a different User Playlist, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit an User Playlist), and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

1. 2.

Customizing Original/User Playlist

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Adding an Original Playlist or User Playlist to a Different User Playlist

322

EDIT ALBUM

10/07/29 12:21:49 31TK4620_327

2011 TL

Turn the interface dial to select the playlist, then press ENTER.

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU for the playlist.

On the HDD audio screen, push up the interface selector to select MUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlist by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.

On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Add to Playlist, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Playlist screen, turn the interface dial and select a desired User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing the Order of Tracks within the User Playlist

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

323

10/07/29 12:21:57 31TK4620_328

2011 TL

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist name, or a desired album to change the original playlist name (album name). Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

Push the interface selector down to return to the Playback screen of the User Playlist.

Turn the interface dial to select where the track is to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Order, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the track to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

7.

8.

4.

5.

6.

317

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Name of the

324

To change user playlist name

To change original playlist name

10/07/29 12:22:06 31TK4620_329

Original Playlist or User Playlist

2011 TL

After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album or Edit Playlist screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

Select a letter by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.

On the Enter an album name screen, input the new Original Playlist name or User Playlist name.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist (or Edit Album to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Playlist Name (or Edit Album Name to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Album, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

5.

6.

7.

8.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

325

10/07/29 12:22:14 31TK4620_330

2011 TL

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select a desired playlist, then turn the interface dial to select the track of which you want to change the name, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Refer to the Music Search function on page

for how to select a playlist.

The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Input the new track name on the Enter a track name screen.

After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new track name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit screen of the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9. 317

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Track Titles

326

OPTIONS ICON

10/07/29 12:22:25 31TK4620_331

2011 TL

CONTINUED

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Enter an artist name screen input the new artist name.

After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist artist name or a desired album to change the original playlist artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.

After selecting the track for which you want to change the track title, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

317

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Artist Name of the Original Playlist or User Playlist

F eatures

327

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:22:34 31TK4620_332

2011 TL

Select a desired playlist to change the artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page

for how to select a playlist. Rotate the interface dial to select a track and press ENTER on the interface selector.

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Choose if you would like to apply the new name to both the album artist and/or the track artist. Select Yes or No by turning the dial, then press ENTER.

2.

1.

8.

9.

7.

317

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Artist Name of the Track

328

OPTIONS ICON

10/07/29 12:22:42 31TK4620_333

2011 TL

The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Input the new track name on the Enter an artist name screen.

After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Track Name screen.

After selecting the track for which you want to change the artists name, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist music genre, or a desired album to change the original playlist music genre. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

4.

5.

6.

7.

3. 8. 1.

317

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Musical Genre

F eatures

329

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:22:51 31TK4620_334

2011 TL

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Genre, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select a genre, and then press ENTER. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

Select the track with the interface dial from the playback screen while it is playing. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

2.

1.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Deleting a Track

330

10/07/29 12:23:00 31TK4620_335

2011 TL

The track options box is displayed. Select Delete and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select OK to confirm you want to delete the track. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.

When you delete a track from the Original Playlist, the track is also deleted from the User Playlist in which the deleted track was stored.

On the HDD playback screen of the album in which you want to delete, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Delete Album (or Delete Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

3.

4.

3.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Deleting an Album

F eatures

331

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:23:09 31TK4620_336

2011 TL

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Get Album Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Select an Album screen, turn the interface dial and select the title information for the Original Playlist, then press ENTER. You will be returned to the Audio Menu screen.

The delete box is displayed. Select OK and then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

When you delete the Original Playlist, any tracks stored in a User Playlist are also deleted.

Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Acquiring Title Information

332

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:23:16 31TK4620_337

2011 TL

You can update the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) that is included with the navigation system.

Consult your dealer, or visit (in U.S.), or

(in Canada), to acquire updated files.

Insert the update disc into the disc slot, or connect the USB flash memory device that includes the update.

You can check the HDD Audio capacity and remaining space as well as the Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB) version included with the navigation system on the HDD Setup screen.

To check the HDD audio capacity, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, then press ENTER.

1.

www.acura.com www.acura.ca

CONTINUED

Updating Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database)

Checking HDD Audio Capacity

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

333

NOTE:

MAXIMUM CAPACITY

VERSION

REMAINING CAPACITY

10/07/29 12:23:24 31TK4620_338

2011 TL

Turn the interface dial and select Update Gracenote Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the dial to select USB or DISC on the Update Gracenote Album info screen, then press ENTER on the selector.

Turn the dial to select Yes on the confirmation screen, and the update will start.

Turn the interface dial to select OK on the confirmation screen.

Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU in the HDD playback screen or CD playback screen.

Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

After updating is complete, press ENTER on the confirmation screen.

Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten.

Any music, data, calendar entries, etc. that have been stored on the HDD can be deleted.

Press the INFO button, rotate the interface dial to select Set up, and press ENTER.

Move the interface selector to the right to navigate to the Set up (Other) screen.

On the Set up (Other) screen, rotate the interface dial to select Clear Personal Data, and press ENTER.

Select the item you wish to delete.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Clearing the HDD

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

334

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:23:37 31TK4620_339

2011 TL

Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. More information about Gracenote is available at (in U.S.) or (in Canada).Music recognition technology and

related data are provided by Gracenote . Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit http://www. gracenote.com/.

When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums.

A pop-up screen verifying whether the deletion is to be continued or not will be displayed. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.

A second confirmation will appear. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.

If you select Music on HDD, the system will automatically restart after deletion.

When you are finished deleting the data, press the interface selector down to select Done.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 2010 Gracenote.

5.

6.

7.

www.acura.com www.acura.ca

CONTINUED

Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

335

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:23:46 31TK4620_340

2011 TL

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 2010 Gracenote. This product and

service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773,

6,161,132, 6,230,192, 6,230,207, 6,240,459, 6,330,593, and other

patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: 6,304,523.

Version 20061005

Gracenote End User License Agreement

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

336

10/07/29 12:23:53 31TK4620_341

2011 TL

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Gracenote 2010

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

337

10/07/29 12:23:59 31TK4620_342

2011 TL

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

338

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

10/07/29 12:24:04 31TK4620_343

2011 TL

The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in- dash disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the HDD/AUX button. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON. The iPod will also be charged with the power mode in these settings.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on

.

You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons.

iPod models confirmed to be compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are:

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

CONTINUED

Model iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB (launch in 2007) iPod nano (3rd and 4th generation) iPod touch (2nd and 3rd generation)

To Play an iPod

Voice Control System

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

339

10/08/06 13:51:14 31TK4620_344

page 178 how to select the power mode, see

2011 TL

Do not connect your iPod using a hub.

Do not keep the iPod and dock connector cable in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it.

Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.

Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.

1. 2.

3.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Connecting an iPod

340

NOTE:

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

10/08/03 20:54:24 31TK4620_345

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at

The current file number and total of the selected playable files are displayed in the center display. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the artist, album and track (file) names on the navigation screen.

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within playing track, press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

You can also select a track from any category on the list: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the interface dial.

Push the interface selector up to display the Music Search screen. Turn the interface dial to select a desired search method.

www.apple.com/itunes/

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

F eatures

341

10/08/03 20:54:33 31TK4620_346

2011 TL

Press ENTER on the interface selector to display the items on that list, then turn the interface dial to make a selection. Press ENTER to set your selection.

If you select ALL on the artists list, the albums list is displayed.

If you select ALL on the albums list, all the tracks become available for selection.

The track order that appears at this time varies depending on the iPod model and software.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

342

10/08/03 20:54:38 31TK4620_347

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Turn the interface dial, select the Repeat icon and press ENTER. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER.

This feature continuously plays a file.

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control screen, then push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Repeat, and press ENTER.

Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen, and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display on the screen.

3.

1.

2.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

REPEAT

F eatures

343

REPEAT

10/07/29 12:24:43 31TK4620_348

2011 TL

Shuffles playback of all available albums, which are selected by the desired list: playlists, artists, albums or songs. This function can be selected at the same time that Repeat Playback is setup.

On the iPod screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Shuffle playback will begin. To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This feature shuffles playback of tracks contained within the iPod. This function can be established at the same time that Repeat Playback is set up.

On the iPod screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. 1.

2.

3.

1.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

ALBUM SHUFFLESHUFFLE

344

ALBUM SHUFFLE ICONSHUFFLE ICON

10/07/29 12:24:52 31TK4620_349

2011 TL

If you see an error message in the center display, see page .

The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show USB NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the audio mode between HDD Audio, USB and Audio.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see the OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Album Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Shuffle playback of the album will begin.

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

:

346

2.

3.

Bluetooth

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

iPod Error Messages

To Stop Playing Your iPod

Disconnecting an iPod

F eatures

345

NOTE:

When you connect your iPod to the navigation system, the most recent settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be carried over.

10/07/29 12:25:03 31TK4620_350

2011 TL

If you see an error message in the center display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

SolutionError Message

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted. Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated. Appears when there are no files in the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

346

UNSUPPORTED Ver. CONNECT RETRY

NO SONG

10/08/03 20:54:41 31TK4620_351

2011 TL

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

347

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

HDD/ AUX BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

10/07/29 12:25:13 31TK4620_352

2011 TL

This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the HDD/AUX button until you see USB in the display. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 15000 files.

Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or higher, and formatted with the FAT file system. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on how to select the power mode, see

.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as it or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

:To Play a USB Flash Memory Device

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

348

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:25:22 31TK4620_353

page 178

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.

Some devices cannot be powered or charged via the USB adapter. If this is the case, use the accessory adapter to supply power to your device.

The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.

You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

Depending on the type of encoding and writing software used, there may be cases where character information does not display properly.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System

F eatures

349

Combining a low sampling f requency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.

10/07/29 12:25:30 31TK4620_354

2011 TL

Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

When the USB device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system, the USB indicator is shown in the center display. It also shows the folder and file numbers. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the USB indicator, the folder and file names, and the elapsed time in the navigation screen.

1.

2.

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device

350

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

10/07/29 12:25:36 31TK4620_355

2011 TL

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio display on the navigation screen. Use the interface dial to highlight the file, then press ENTER to set your selection.

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it twice to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from Folder and File Lists

To Change or Select Files

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

SKIP

Folder Selection

F eatures

351

10/07/29 12:25:42 31TK4620_356

2011 TL

To go back to the normal playing display, press the AUDIO button. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio mode display.

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

You can select any type of repeat, random or scan mode on the audio menu screen. This function repeats playback of

Push the selector up to display the Select a folder screen. Then turn the interface dial to select a folder, and press ENTER.

If you have more than one layer of folders (folders within folders), you can also see each folder on the screen.

Move the interface selector up to select BACK to show the USB screen, or press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER.

1.

2.

To Select Repeat, Random

TRACK REPEAT

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

352

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON

10/07/29 12:25:53 31TK4620_357

or Sacn Mode:

the track.

2011 TL

Turn the interface knob, select the Track Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER.

This function replays all the tracks in a folder in the order that they were stored.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the folder that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also cancels this function.

3. 3.

1.

2.

FOLDER REPEAT

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

353

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

10/07/29 12:26:01 31TK4620_358

2011 TL

This function plays all the tracks on the USB flash memory device in random order.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Track Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The tracks are played in random order.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function plays all of the tracks in the current folder in random order.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

2. 2.

1.

3.TRACK RANDOM FOLDER RANDOM

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

354

TRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

10/07/29 12:26:12 31TK4620_359

2011 TL

Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The files are played in random order.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function samples all the tracks in the current folder in the order that they were recorded.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select Track Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Each track or file is sampled for 10 seconds. When all the tracks in the folder have been scanned, regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.

3. 3.

1.

2.

TRACK SCAN

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

355

TRACK SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

10/07/29 12:26:20 31TK4620_360

2011 TL

This function samples the first file in each folder within the USB flash memory device.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select Folder Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

The first file of the first folder is sampled for 10 seconds. If no other operations are carried out, the first files of the remaining folders are played for 10 seconds. After the first file of the last folder is played back, regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the audio mode between HDD Audio, USB and Audio.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

1.

2.

3.

Bluetooth

To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

FOLDER SCAN

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

356

FOLDER SCAN ICON

10/07/29 12:26:31 31TK4620_361

2011 TL

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Always follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

If you see an error message in the center display, see page .358

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

357

10/07/29 12:26:36 31TK4620_362

2011 TL

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted. Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM. Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

358

FILE ERROR

UNSUPPORTED UNPLAYABLE FILE

NO SONG

10/08/03 20:56:48 31TK4620_363

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

359

INTERFACE DIAL

TITLE BUTTON

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

AUDIO BUTTON

HDD/AUX BUTTON

10/07/29 12:26:46 31TK4620_364

2011 TL

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Audio system, which

allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Audio compatible phone. This function is only available on phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles

HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on

.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Press the HDD/AUX button with the power mode ACCESSORY or ON. When the phone is recognized, you will see the Audio

message and icon on the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected), and the system begins to play.

If an iPod or USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected). Push the HDD/AUX button again to play audio files from your Audio phone.In some states, provinces,

and territories, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 528-7876.

:

406

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.handsfreelink.ca

To Play Audio FilesBluetooth

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

360

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:26:54 31TK4620_365

how to select the power mode, see page 178

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Once a device is linked, the name of the device will appear on the screen. Pressing the TITLE button switches the center display between the

Audio and the device name.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message after pressing the TITLE button.

The phone is not linked to HFL.

The phone is not turned on.

The phone is not in the vehicle.

Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for

Audio, is already connected.

You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

If your Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone.

To find out if your phone is approved, go to (in Canada, ), or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.

The skip function may not be available on some phone devices.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink www.handsfreelink.ca

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System

To skip a file

F eatures

361

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:27:04 31TK4620_366

2011 TL

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily.

Turn the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Resume/Pause, then press ENTER to set your selection. Each time you press ENTER, the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode.

The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display. Turn the dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Sound Setup, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

362

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:27:11 31TK4620_367

2011 TL

Turn the dial to select a sound setup mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. See page for more sound setting information.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

If you receive a call when the Audio is playing, press the

PICK-UP button on the steering wheel. The screen and the center display switch to the HFL mode (see page ).

After ending the call, press the HANG-UP button to go back to the

Audio mode.

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; AM/FM, , DISC, or HDD/AUX on the audio control panel, or press the MODE button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode.

288

408

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode

To switch to HFL mode

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

363

10/07/29 12:27:20 31TK4620_368

2011 TL

Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.

When recording a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc player.

When using DVD-R/RW discs, they should meet DVD verification standards.

When using CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.

On models with navigation system On models without navigation system

All modelsGeneral Information

Protecting Your Discs

364

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

10/07/29 12:27:28 31TK4620_369

2011 TL

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in

The in-dash disc player has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shown as follows.

CONTINUED

Protecting Discs Additional Information on Recommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs F

eatures

365

10/07/29 12:27:36 31TK4620_370

the drive.

2011 TL

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

Small, irregular shaped discs1.

2. 3.

4.

Protecting Your Discs

366

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/ Cracked

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

With Label/ Sticker

Using Printer Label Kit

With Plastic Ring

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Can Shape Arrow Shape

10/07/29 12:27:47 31TK4620_371

2011 TL

Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the following formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual- disc .

5.

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Protecting Your Discs F

eatures

367

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

10/07/29 12:27:57 31TK4620_372

2011 TL

Those bands cover these

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio stations signal gets weaker

as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the stations signal.

Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radios reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.

Your vehicles radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicles radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the stations transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

368

10/07/29 12:28:05 31TK4620_373

frequencies:

2011 TL

Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the stations transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception F

eatures

369

10/07/29 12:28:11 31TK4620_374

2011 TL

Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.

The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, disc (if a disc is loaded), HDD (on models with navigation system), Audio (if paired), AUX (if an appropriate audio unit is connected).

If an iPod or a USB flash memory device is plugged into the system, you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous preset station. If you press and hold the CH button ( ) or ( ), the system goes into the skip (seek) mode. It stops when it finds a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track/file (file in MP3, WMA, or AAC format) each time you press the top ( ) of the CH button. Press the bottom ( ) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to return to the previous track/file.

You will see the track/file number and the elapsed time. If the disc has text data or is compressed in MP3 or WMA, you can also see any other information (track title, file name, folder name, etc.).

In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, you can use the seek function to select folders. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous folder.

Bluetooth

Remote Audio Controls

370

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

10/07/29 12:28:18 31TK4620_375

2011 TL

When playing a USB flash memory device, you can also use the seek function to skip the folder. To activate this, press and hold either side of the CH button until you hear a beep.

If you are playing a conventional CD (without the text data and not compressed in MP3 or WMA), you can use the skip function to select discs. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the next disc. Press and hold the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous disc.

If you are playing a USB flash memory device or iPod with the USB adapter cable, press and release the top ( ) of the CH button to skip forward to the beginning of the next file. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it twice to return to the previous file.

On models without navigation system

Remote Audio Controls F

eatures

371

10/07/29 12:28:23 31TK4620_376

2011 TL

The auxiliary input jack is inside the console compartment. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.

When you plug in a mini-jack cable between a compatible audio unit and the jack, you will see AUX in the display and the system automatically switches to AUX mode.

When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the HDD/AUX button (AUX button on models without navigation system) to select it.

Auxiliary Input Jack

372

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

10/07/29 12:28:27 31TK4620_377

2011 TL

Your vehicles audio system may disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code with the preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a radio code card that lists your audio systems code and serial numbers. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio systems serial number in this owners manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your dealer. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number.

If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have ten tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected.

If you have a My Acura account, you can retrieve the anti-theft code online.

If your vehicles battery is discon- nected or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display (on the center display on models with navigation system) the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is on the radio code card included in your owners manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.

Radio Theft Protection F

eatures

373

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:28:34 31TK4620_378

2011 TL

To set the time, press the CLOCK button until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H (hour) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M (minute) button until the numbers advance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, press and hold the CLOCK button, then press the R (reset) button to set the time back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, the same procedure sets the time forward to the beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically by the GPS. Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00. 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example: On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Setting the Clock

374

On models without navigation system

HOUR BUTTON (PRESET 4)

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON (PRESET 6)

MINUTE BUTTON (PRESET 5)

10/07/29 12:28:43 31TK4620_379

2011 TL

You can also adjust the clock and switch the clock display between 24-hours and 12-hours in the menu mode.

To adjust the clock setting:

You can adjust the clock setting with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press and release the SETUP button. The display shows you the menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select CLOCK ADJUST.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display changes to the clock adjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to select the item which you want to adjust. Turning the selector knob will change the selected item between the clock display setting, hours, minutes, and SET. The selected item is indicated with in the display.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

On models without navigation system Adjusting the Clock with SETUP Button

Setting the Clock F

eatures

375

10/07/29 12:28:52 31TK4620_380

2011 TL

Turn the selector knob to change the setting between 12H and 24H.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

To set the time, turn the selector knob and select the hours or the minutes, then press the knob to enter your selection. The display changes to the setting display.

Turn the selector knob to count the numbers up or down.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

While setting the clock, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button again will cancel this setting mode.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Setting the Clock

376

MINUTE SETTING

10/07/29 12:29:02 31TK4620_381

2011 TL

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking lights, side marker lights and taillights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the audio unit. This alarm continues for 2 minutes, then the system resets. To reset an activated system before the 2 minutes have elapsed, unlock the drivers door with the key or use the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

You can also turn off an activated system by grabbing either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote to unlock the door.

To enter the clock setting, turn the selector knob to select SET, then press the knob. The display will return to the menu item display.

Press either the RETURN or SETUP button to go back to the normal display.

The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the

doors from the outside with the key, drivers lock tab, master door lock switch, or remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with keyless access system). The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.

11.

10.

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system

Security System

Setting the Clock, Security System F

eatures

377

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

A/T model is shown.

10/07/29 12:29:10 31TK4620_382

2011 TL

With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the drivers door, the trunk release handle behind the trunk pass-through cover, or the emergency trunk opener.

Use the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote to quickly check that the hood, the trunk, and all doors are closed. Push the lock button twice within 5 seconds. There should be an audible confirmation beep.

The security system will not set if the hood, trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and check the indicators on the multi-information display. Close any door or the trunk indicated on the display. Check the hood visually since it is not part of the display, and shut it if necessary.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

Once the security system is set, opening any door (without using the key or the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote), the hood, or the trunk will cause the alarm to activate. It will also activate if the audio unit is removed from the dashboard or the wiring is cut.

You can also set the security system by pressing the lock button on either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote.

:

178 181

On models with keyless access system

Security System

378

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:29:16 31TK4620_383

2011 TL

Compass operation can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnels, over railroad crossings, past large vehicles, or driving near large objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. It can also be affected by accessories such as antennas and roof racks that are mounted by magnets.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the compass is self-calibrating, then the compass display is shown in the display.

The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field. If the compass seems to be continually showing the wrong direction and is not self-calibrating, or the compass display is blinking with the CAL indicator on, do the following procedure.

Do this procedure in an open area, away from buildings, power lines, and other vehicles.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

1.

2.

On models without navigation system

CONTINUED

Compass Operation Compass Calibration

Compass F

eatures

379

NOTE:

COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

U.S. model is shown.

COMPASS

10/07/29 12:29:26 31TK4620_384

2011 TL

Turn the selector knob to select CALIBRATION.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you PUSH CAL START.

While setting the compass, press the RETURN button to go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.

When the calibration is successfully completed, the CAL indicator goes off and the compass display will stop blinking and show an actual heading.

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is calibrating, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

Press the selector knob (ENTER). The compass display is blinking and the CAL indicator is shown.

Drive the vehicle slowly in two complete circles.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Compass

380

10/07/29 12:29:34 31TK4620_385

2011 TL

Once the correct zone is displayed, press the selector knob. The display then returns to normal.

Find the zone for your area on the map . If the correct zone is not shown, turn the selector knob to cycle the zone lists up or down.

In most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone selection is required so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone, do this:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If necessary, press the RETURN button to return to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.

Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select ZONE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you the currently selected zone number.

4. 5.

2.

3.

1.

CONTINUED

Compass Zone Selection

Compass F

eatures

381

ZONE NUMBER

10/07/29 12:29:44 31TK4620_386

2011 TL

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is in the zone setting mode, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

Compass

382

Zone Map

10/07/29 12:29:48 31TK4620_387

2011 TL

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel will come on.

Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated.

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your vehicle speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel the cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will come back on.

The cruise control system can be left on, even when it is not in use.

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control F

eatures

383

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

10/07/29 12:29:56 31TK4620_388

2011 TL

You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.

You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

To increase the speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle speeds up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/ DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.

To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease your speed quickly, use the brakes as you normally would.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will go out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/ DECEL button.

Resting your foot on the brake or clutch pedal causes the cruise control to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

384

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:30:05 31TK4620_389

2011 TL

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the system will remember the previously set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle will accelerate to the same cruising speed as before.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control F

eatures

385

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

10/07/29 12:30:11 31TK4620_390

2011 TL

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Before programming your HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features.

If your garage door was manufactured before April 1, 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it. These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1, 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features. If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a 2 4 under the closing door. The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood. As an additional safety feature, garage door openers manufactured after January 1, 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems, such as an electronic eye, which detect an object obstructing the door.

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener

to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage. When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.

If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 10 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes. Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.

General Safety Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLink

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Before you begin

386

10/07/29 12:30:20 31TK4620_391

2011 TL

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

387

10/07/29 12:30:34 31TK4620_392

2011 TL

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

388

10/07/29 12:30:38 31TK4620_393

2011 TL

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using voice commands, without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

Press and release to give a command or answer a call.

Press and release to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel the command.

In the U.S., visit , or call (888) 528-7876.

Air or wind noise from the dashboard and side vents, windows and moonroof may interfere with the microphone. Adjust or close them as necessary.

In Canada, visit or call (888) 528-7876.

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you want to make a command. After the beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.

CONTINUED

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

HFL Buttons Voice Control Tips

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

389

MICROPHONE

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL TALK BUTTON

10/07/29 12:30:48 31TK4620_394

2011 TL

Try to reduce all background noise. If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say Call 123-456- or Dial Peter.

To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To hear general HFL information, including help on pairing a phone or setting up the system, say Tutorial.

For help at any time, including a list of available commands, say Hands free help.

As an incoming call notification, you will see the following display:

Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and roaming status information to HFL.

When there is an incoming call, or HFL is in use, HANDSFREELINK will appear on the display.

indicator will be displayed on the audio display when a phone is linked.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Help Features

Information Display

390

SIGNAL STRENGTH

HFL MODE

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

ROAM STATUS PHONE NUMBER

ROAM STATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:30:59 31TK4620_395

2011 TL

CONTINUED

How to Use HFL

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

391

Phone Setup

Call or Dial

Pair

Edit

Delete

Jim Smith

Set Pairing Code

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

List

Status

Next Phone

Press HFL Talk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

123-456-

Pair a phone to the system(See page 394)

Edit the name of a paired phone(See page 395)

Delete a paired phone from the system(See page 395)

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system(See page 395)

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system (See page 396)

Search for another previously paired phone to link to(See page 396)

Set the pairing code to a Fixed or Random number (See page 396)

Enter desired phone number (See page 397)

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here. (See page 397)

10/07/29 12:31:06 31TK4620_396

2011 TL

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

392

Redial

Transfer

Mute

Send

Phonebook

Store

Edit

Delete

Receive Contact

List

Press HFL Talk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Redial the last number called(See page 397)

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call

(See page 398)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 399)

(See page 399)

Store a phonebook entry (See page 400)

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 400)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 401)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from your phone to HFL (See page 401)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 401)

10/07/29 12:31:12 31TK4620_397

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

393

Change Language

Hands Free Help

System Set up

Tutorial

Clear

Auto Transfer

Call Notification

Security

Change Passcode

Press HFL Talk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

: Canadian models

(See page 402) Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key cycle to access the system

Change your security passcode(See page 403)

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call (See page 403)

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle(See page 403)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security passcode(See page 404)

Change language from English to French (See page 404)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system(See page 390)

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command (See page 390)

10/07/29 12:31:18 31TK4620_398

2011 TL

To use HFL, you need to pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system.

Press and release the HFL Talk button. If you are pairing a phone for the first time, HFL will give you information about the pairing process. If it is not the first phone you are pairing, say

and say .

Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit pairing code and begin searching for your phone.

When your phone finds a Bluetooth device, select HFL from the options and enter the 4-digit code from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone.

This command group is available for paired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discovery or search mode to pair. Refer to your phones manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phone is not ready to pair or a phone is not found, the system will time out and return to idle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

To pair a cell phone:

Phone pairing tips

Phone setup Pair

Phone Setup

394

10/07/29 12:31:27 31TK4620_399

2011 TL

Say .

Say after the prompts.

If there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL will ask you which phones name you want to change. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

HFL will ask you which phone you want to delete. Follow the HFL prompts to continue with the deletion.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

HFL will read out all the paired phones names.

Say after the prompts.

Say . 1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2. 1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

Delete List

Phone setup

To hear the names of all paired phones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

395

10/07/29 12:31:38 31TK4620_400

2011 TL

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

HFL will tell you which phone is linked to the system.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say . Say .

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say after the prompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone.

Once another phone is found, it is linked to the system. HFL will inform you which phone is now linked.

If no other phones are found or paired, HFL will inform you that the original phone is linked again.

Say after the prompts.

If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say . If you want to choose your own 4-digit code to be used each time, say and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To hear which paired phone is currently linked:

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setup Phone setup

Next phone Set pairing code

Random

Fixed

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

396

10/07/29 12:31:49 31TK4620_401

2011 TL

You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called.

Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to HFL. HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. However, this may weaken the vehicles battery.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say or .

Follow the HFL prompts and say the name stored in the HFL phonebook that you want to call.

Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the name and make the call.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say or .

Follow the HFL prompts and say the phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number and say or .

Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers.

Press and release the HFL Talk button and say .

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Making a Call

Call Dial Call Dial

Call Dial

Redial

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook:

To make a call using a phone number:

To redial the last number called by HFL:

F eatures

397

10/07/29 12:32:00 31TK4620_402

2011 TL

When you receive a call, an incoming call notification (if activated) will play and interrupt the audio system if it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answer the call, or the HFL Back button to hang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, press and release the HFL Talk button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, press the HFL Talk button again. If you dont want to answer the incoming call, disregard it and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the HFL Back button.

You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

Press and release the HFL Talk button and say .

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

Transfer

Call Waiting

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

398

10/07/29 12:32:07 31TK4620_403

2011 TL

CONTINUED

You can mute your voice to the person you are talking to during a call.

To mute your voice during a call, press and release the HFL Talk button and say .

To unmute your voice, press and release the HFL Talk button and say again.

HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Follow the HFL prompts and say the name or number you want to send.

Follow the HFL prompts to send the tones and continue the call.

To send a pound ( ), say pound. To send a star (*), say star.

You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers you store can be not only phone numbers but other types, such as account numbers or passwords, which can be sent during a menu-driven call.

1.

2.

3.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Muting a Call

Mute

Mute

Send Numbers or Names During a Call

Send

Phonebook

To send a name or number during a call:

F eatures

399

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:32:17 31TK4620_404

2011 TL

Avoid using duplicate name entries.

Avoid using home as a name entry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or longer name. For example, use Peter instead of Pete, or John Smith instead of John.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

Follow the HFL prompts and say the name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new number for that name.

Follow the HFL prompts to complete the edit.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry.

Say the number you want to store for the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say to store the entry.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Store

Enter

To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

400

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:32:29 31TK4620_405

2011 TL

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

Say the name you want to delete and follow the HFL prompts to complete the deletion.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call, immediately press the HFL Talk button and say .

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL.

Say after the prompts.

Say .

Follow the HFL prompts and name the number, or say if it is not the number you want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if you want to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL phonebook (available on some phones):

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

401

10/07/29 12:32:42 31TK4620_406

2011 TL

This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Once a passcode is set, you will need to enter it to use HFL each time you start the vehicle. If you forget the code, your dealer will have to reset it for you, or you will have to clear the entire system (see page ).

Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and say the 4-digit passcode you want to set.

Say after the prompts.

1.

2.

3.

4.

404

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security purposes:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

402

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:32:50 31TK4620_407

2011 TL

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say . Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and say the new 4-digit passcode.

Say after the prompts.

The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say or . You can also say for no audible incoming call notification.

Say after the prompts.

HFL will let you know if auto transfer is on or off, depending on the previous setting. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting.

Say after the prompts.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

CONTINUED

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone Prompt Off

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notif ication :

To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

403

10/07/29 12:33:03 31TK4620_408

2011 TL

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want to change to in that language.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Follow the HFL prompts to change the language to English or French.

When French is your currently selected language, you can give voice commands in French.

If you have not named your paired phone in the language you just selected, HFL will ask you to name it in the current language.

This operation clears the passcodes, paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook.

Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.

Say .

Say after the prompts.

Follow the HFL prompts to continue to complete the clearing procedure.

You can also clear the system when you have forgotten the passcode and cannot access HFL. When HFL asks you for the passcode, say

. Paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook will be lost.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1. 1.

2.

Canadian models only Canadian models only To clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system language between English and French:

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change language System setup

Clear

System clear

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

404

10/07/29 12:33:17 31TK4620_409

2011 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Bluetooth Bluetooth

The name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the call is ended.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology HFL Limitations

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

405

10/07/29 12:33:24 31TK4620_410

2011 TL

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using either the navigation system controls or voice commands without the distraction of handling your cell phone.

In the U.S., visit , or call (888) 528-7876.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

Use the Interface Dial to make menu or list selections.

To select an item on the screen, turn the interface dial left or right to highlight it, and then press ENTER.

To select an item that comes with , , , or icons,

push the interface selector up, down, left, or right.

In Canada, visit or call (888) 528-7876. Press the CANCEL button to go

back to the previous screen.

Press the INFO button to go to the main information screen to select the Cellular Phone menu.

Using HFL

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Interface Dial

406

INFO BUTTON

SELECTOR

DIAL

ENTER

CANCEL BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 12:33:35 31TK4620_411

2011 TL

CONTINUED

To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

Try to reduce all background noise. If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, commands may be misinterpreted.

For help at any time, including a list of available options, say Help.

Refer to the navigation system manual for how to change the systems language between English, French, and Spanish.

Press and release the Talk button each time you want to make a command. After the beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.

Air or wind noise from the dashboard and side vents, windows and moonroof may interfere with the microphone. Adjust or close them as necessary.

Press and release to answer a call, or press to go directly to the Cellular Phone screen.

Press and release to end or decline a call.

Press and release to give a command.

Press and release to go back to the previous command, or cancel the command.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Help Feature

Language Selection

Voice Control TipsHFL Buttons

PICK-UP Button

HANG-UP Button

TALK Button

BACK Button

F eatures

407

MICROPHONEPICK-UP BUTTON

TALK BUTTON

HANG-UP BUTTON

BACK BUTTON

10/07/29 12:33:48 31TK4620_412

2011 TL

Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and roaming status information to HFL.

As an incoming call notification, you will see the following display:

To answer the call and show the HFL information, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

HFL Display

408

U.S. model is shown.

CALLER NAME PHONE DIALING

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

LENGTH OF CALL TIME

ROAM STATUS

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:33:55 31TK4620_413

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

How to Use HFL

F eatures

409

Pair your phone to the system.

Delete a previously paired phone.

Switch from a currently linked phone to another paired phone.

Create a user name for a paired phone.

Create a PIN number for a paired phone.

Delete a user name and settings for a paired phone.

Setup Bluetooth

Phone

Search for next

phone

Cellular Phone

Pass-Key

Pair Phone

Delete Phone

Name

Delete

PIN

Edit User

Set a fixed or random pass-key code for phone pairing.

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON (see page 178).

Voice commands can be used for all above options.

Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.

Phone Setup

10/07/29 12:34:01 31TK4620_414

2011 TL

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

410

Cellular Phone

Import Cellular

Phonebook

Delete Voice Tag

Store Voice Tag

Store Speed-dial

Delete Speed-dial

Delete Imported

Phonebook

Import your entire cell phones phonebook data to the system.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Select a number from Call History or Phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Delete a previously imported phonebook.

Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.

Voice commands can be used for all above options.

Phone Setup

Edit Speed Dial

10/07/29 12:34:05 31TK4620_415

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

411

Cellular Phone

Dial

Phonebook

Call History

Speed dial entries

More Speed Dial

Mute

Transfer

Dial

Enter a phone number to dial.

Send numbers or names during a call.

Mute your voice during a call.

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

Display the paired phones previously imported phonebook (or import a new one).

Display a list of all 20 speed dial entries.

Eric

Mike

Lisa

John

The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on the Cellular Phone screen.

: Example

Dial

Voice commands can be used for all above options.

Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.

Display the last 30 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)

10/07/29 12:34:10 31TK4620_416

2011 TL

To use HFL, you need to pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system.

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means, the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

Press the PICK-UP button to go directly to the Cellular Phone screen.

Select PHONE SETUP from the Cellular Phone screen.

This menu group is for phone pairing, and user, phonebook, and speed dial editing.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Phone SetupCellular Phone

412

Push the selector down for PHONE SETUP.

10/07/29 12:34:17 31TK4620_417

2011 TL

CONTINUED

To pair a cell phone:

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Select Setup Bluetooth Phone from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Pair Phone.

HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key that you will need to input on your phone.

When your phone prompts you, input the 4-digit pass-key.

Put your cell phone in Discovery or Search mode, and search for a Bluetooth device.

You will receive a notification to set up an AcuraLink connection. If you want to do this, please see page , or select Setup Later.

You will receive a notification on the screen and your phone if pairing is successful.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

425

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Setup Bluetooth Phone

F eatures

413

Example

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/29 12:34:29 31TK4620_418

2011 TL

To create your own pass-key, select Fixed and follow steps 3 and 4.

Delete the current pass-key.

Enter a new pass-key, and select OK.

Select Setup Bluetooth Phone from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Pass-key.

The default pass-key 0000 is used until you change the setting.

For a randomly generated pass-key each time you pair a phone, select Random.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.

3.

1.

2. 4.

To change the pass-key setting:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Phone pairing tips

414

NOTE:

Example

Push the selector to left to delete.

10/07/29 12:34:40 31TK4620_419

2011 TL

CONTINUED

You can name up to six HFL users. Each can be PIN protected, and have its own phonebook, speed dial, and call history.

Select the user you want to edit on the Cellular Phone screen.

If the user you selected is PIN- protected, the Speed Dial list on the right side of the screen will not appear until the PIN is entered.

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone, select Search for next phone on the Phone Setup screen.

HFL disconnects the linked phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

If no other paired phone is found, HFL will automatically link the previous phone.

Select Setup Bluetooth Phone from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Delete a phone.

Select the phone you want to delete. The Bluetooth icon shows you the currently linked phone.

A trash icon appears next to the selected phone. Select OK to continue.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To delete a paired phone:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Edit UserSearch for Next Connected Phone

F eatures

415

SPEED DIAL LIST

Select a user name.

TRASH ICON

BLUETOOTH ICON

10/07/29 12:34:53 31TK4620_420

2011 TL

Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, and select OK.

Follow the prompts to complete the deletion.

Select Delete.

Select Edit User from the Phone Setup screen.

Deleting a user will delete all settings, such as call history and phonebook.

If the user is already PIN-protected, you need to enter the current PIN before creating a new one.

If you select DO NOT USE PIN, before entering any number, the user will not have a PIN.

When you set a PIN for a user, you will be asked to enter the PIN every time you select the user on the Cellular Phone screen.

Select Edit User from the Phone Setup screen.

Select PIN.

Select Name.

Enter a user name, and select OK when complete.

Select Edit User from the Phone Setup screen.

2.

1.

2.

1.

3.

3. 2.

1.

3.

To delete a user:

To create a PIN for each user:To name a user:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

416

10/07/29 12:35:06 31TK4620_421

2011 TL

CONTINUED

(available on some phones)

Select Import Cellular Phonebook from the Phone Setup screen.

HFL begins importing the phonebook. Select OK after the import is completed.

Up to three category icons appear next to the phonebook entries .

These indicate how many numbers are stored for the name. If a name has more than three category icons, is displayed.

Available on some phones

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per user, and the first four numbers are displayed on the Cellular Phone screen.

Select a No Entry field to store a speed dial entry, or use the following procedure.

The entire phonebook data (1,000 entries) of the cell phone that is linked to HFL can be imported to the system.

1.

2.

:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Import Cellular Phonebook Edit Speed Dial

F eatures

417

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

The first four speed dial entries

10/07/29 12:35:19 31TK4620_422

2011 TL

To store a speed dial number: Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Store Speed-dial.

Select a number on the speed dial list where you want to store the number.

When a voice tag is stored for the entry, you can dial the number by saying Call and the voice tag name.

Choose a number from:

Phonebook the linked cell phones imported phonebook

Call History the last 30 numbers

When the speed dial number is successfully stored, you are asked to store a voice tag for the number. Follow the prompts.

2.

4.

1.

3.

5.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

418

10/08/06 13:36:29 31TK4620_423

2011 TL

CONTINUED

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number:

To delete a voice tag:

Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Store Voice Tag.

Select the number you want to store a voice tag for.

Follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using home as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.

Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Delete Voice Tag.

Select the number you want to delete the voice tag for, and select OK.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

419

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:35:39 31TK4620_424

2011 TL

To delete a speed dial number: Select Edit Speed Dial from the Phone Setup screen.

Select Delete Speed-dial.

Select the number you want to delete, and select OK.

This option deletes the entire phonebook of the currently linked cell phone. Follow the confirmation and notification screens.

During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). However, this may weaken the vehicles battery.

For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, using the imported phonebook, using the call history, or with speed dial entries.2.

1.

3.

178

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Delete Imported Phonebook Making a Call

420

10/07/29 12:35:49 31TK4620_425

2011 TL

CONTINUED

To make a call using a phone number: To make a call using a name

Select Dial from the Cellular Phone screen.

Enter the phone number, and select Dial.

To enter the phone number by voice, say it in a continuous string.

Select Phone Book from the Cellular Phone screen.

If a phonebook has not yet been imported, the system will attempt to import one first.

Select a name from the list. You can also select SEARCH PHONEBOOK and enter the first few letters of the name.

Push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.

1.

2.

1.

3.

2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

421

Push the selector down to select SEARCH PHONEBOOK.

10/07/29 12:35:59 31TK4620_426

in the Phone Book:

2011 TL

To make a call using Call History: To make a call using Speed Dial: To make a call using More Speed Dial:

Select Call History from the Cellular Phone screen.

Call History is sorted by All, Dial, Receive, and Missed. Selecting a number begins automatic dialing.

Select one of the four entries on the Cellular Phone screen, and push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.

Select More Speed Dial on the Cellular Phone screen.

A list of up to 20 stored speed dial entries is shown. Select the entry you want to call, and push ENTER to begin automatic dialing.

: Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from the Cellular Phone screen.

1.

2.

2.

1.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

422

NOTE

HISTORY LIST

VOICE TAG ICON

SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON

10/07/29 12:36:09 31TK4620_427

2011 TL

CONTINUED

The following options are available during a call:

When you receive a call, a notification appears on the screen (see page ).

To answer the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel.

To end or decline the call, press the HANG-UP button.

Allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.

Allows you to transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

Allows you to mute your voice.

Available on some phones:

408

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

During a CallReceiving a Call

Dial

Transfer

Mute

F eatures

423

Example

10/07/29 12:36:19 31TK4620_428

2011 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

U.S. models only

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the call is ended.

In addition, you cannot use HFL while using AcuraLink.

The name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

If your phone has Call Waiting, press and release the PICK-UP button to put the original call on hold and answer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, press the PICK-UP button again. If you dont want to answer the incoming call, disregard it and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the HANG-UP button.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

HFL Limitations

Wireless TechnologyBluetooth

Call Waiting

424

10/07/29 12:36:27 31TK4620_429

2011 TL

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server. Working through the XM Radio, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information on your vehicles features.

Important recall and safety information.

Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.

Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.

The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

Bluetooth

Interface Dial

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

On models with navigation system

F eatures

425

CANCEL BUTTON

ENTER SELECTORDIAL

10/07/29 12:36:36 31TK4620_430

2011 TL

A list of all messages will be shown. New messages will be at the top. Select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER.

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. The information screen will be shown.

A red exclamation will be marked on an envelope icon with an important message.

If you have new messages, an envelope icon appears in the lower left hand part of the navigation screen.

To open a message: Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Message from the navigation system map menu.

Reading Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

426

10/07/29 12:36:45 31TK4620_431

2011 TL

Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.

Only Diagnostic Info messages appear on the navigation screen while driving. They indicate if your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page ).

After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately. Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.

Select Messages, then select a message category. Select the message you want to read and press ENTER.

When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that option will not be highlighted.

436

CONTINUED

Message Options

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

427

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:36:53 31TK4620_432

2011 TL

Select this option to delete the current message.

Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice option, it changes to a Stop Reading option. Select the option again to stop the voice.

To set your AcuraLink preferences (the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the My Acura website at , and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.

To make a call, your compatible phone must be paired to the vehicles HandsFreeLink system, powered on, and located within the vehicle (see page ).

Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.

Select this option to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from. AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If your assigned servicing dealer changes, AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.

Select this option to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select ,

HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you.

Select this option to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cell phone must be paired with HFL. In addition, the paired phone must have a compatible data service and be set up with the AcuraLink system to make a data connection. Go to

to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.

413

www.owners.acura.com Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

Delete

Voice

Message Preferences

Find Nearest Dealer

Call Your Dealer

Call

Call

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

428

10/07/29 12:37:01 31TK4620_433

2011 TL

Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer. To delete a single message:

Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the message category that contains the message you want to delete.

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messages command does not apply to Diagnostic Info and Recall messages. They can only be deleted by your dealer.

Press the SETUP button to view the setup screen.

Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select Other by pushing the interface selector to the right.

Use the interface dial to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to Delete with the interface dial, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface dial to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Deleting Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

429

NOTE: NOTE:

10/07/29 12:37:11 31TK4620_434

2011 TL

There are six message categories in AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature Guide, Maintenance Minder , Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Scheduled Dealer Appointment. The system can store up to 255 messages.

Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.

These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other TL owners, supplement your Owners Manual. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura Client Services directly through the HFL.

During the first 90 days of ownership, a number of messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the features of your vehicle.

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

430

TM

10/07/29 12:37:18 31TK4620_435

2011 TL

These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.

You can use the following message options:

Make an appointment with your dealer.

Reschedule the appointment with the dealer.

Call your dealer for an appointment.

Find the nearest dealer.

You can make an appointment with your dealer through AcuraLink when you receive a Maintenance Minder message.

To use the automated appointment function, you should visit the My Acura website at

, register some required settings, and complete the Phone-Data Connection set-up (see page ). Your compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicle (see page ).

439

413

www.owners.acura.com

Bluetooth

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder Automated Appointment

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

431

TM

10/07/29 12:37:28 31TK4620_436

2011 TL

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

When you see the Maintenance Minder message on the multi- information display, you will also receive a message in the navigation screen. To open the message, press ENTER. Select New Messages, then press ENTER. You will see the list of all messages. The most recent message is listed at the top.

Select the received message, then press ENTER. You will see the message as shown. To make an appointment, select Schedule Dealer Appt. then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

432

10/07/29 12:37:34 31TK4620_437

2011 TL

CONTINUED

You will see the screen to reschedule as shown. To make an appointment, select Reschedule Appointment, then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen. Make sure to confirm the appointment date, time and dealer. If it is OK, press ENTER.

If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, select Cancel, then press ENTER.

Press the INFO button to go to the information screen. Select Messages, then select Scheduled Dealer Appointment from the message category list. Then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

To reschedule the appointment: Scheduled Dealer Appointment

F eatures

433

10/07/29 12:37:43 31TK4620_438

2011 TL

The system will request you to confirm the cancel on the navigation screen. To cancel the appointment, select YES, then press ENTER. If you select NO, the screen goes back to the previous message display.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen. If you accept the cancel, press ENTER.

Select Messages on the information screen, then press ENTER. Select Scheduled Dealer Appointment from the message category list. Then press ENTER. To cancel the appointment, select Cancel Appointment, then press ENTER.

To cancel the appointment:

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

434

10/07/29 12:37:50 31TK4620_439

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If you cancel the appointment, you cannot reschedule it. If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, call your dealer directly with HFL.

Using automated appointments, your registered dealer through My Acura is automatically selected. If you want to select another dealer, such as in case of an emergency, find the nearest dealer and call the dealer directly with HFL.

When a maintenance appointment is due soon, you will also receive an appointment reminder message.

If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it. You will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

Recall/Campaigns

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

435

10/07/29 12:37:56 31TK4620_440

2011 TL

When any indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID, AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, An indicator is on. AcuraLink can help you decide what to do.

When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi- Information Display (MID), AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.

The AcuraLink system cannot determine mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.

For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page .

For this reason, it is important that we retain your current phone number. Please update your information using My Acura at

If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option.

64

www.owners.acura.com.

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

436

10/07/29 12:38:04 31TK4620_441

2011 TL

If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)

Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait until a later date.

You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

When viewing a diagnostic info message through the INFO menu, you can use the Diagnostic Info option to connect to the Acura server and retrieve the latest information regarding the problem.

There may not be any additional information, depending on the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server.

When you make an appointment through My Acuras online Schedule Service Appointment, you can be reminded in advance about that appointment through AcuraLink.

If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment, see page .433

CONTINUED

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

Reminder Message

F eatures

437

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:38:13 31TK4620_442

2011 TL

Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.

Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at My Acuras online scheduling website.

Appointments can still be created, rescheduled, and canceled from the vehicle; however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated. Any changes to those appointments should be made from the My Acura website.

To access the following functions, press the SETUP option, push the interface selector to the right to select Other, then rotate the interface dial to select AcuraLink/ Messages.

Delete Messages

AcuraLink/Message Screen

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

438

10/07/29 12:38:20 31TK4620_443

2011 TL

For the Phone-Data

Connection button to be active, you need a compatible and enabled cell phone paired to

HandsFreeLink (HFL). To complete the data connection setup, the paired phone must have a compatible data service.

Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.

Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen). Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the screen). Messages can still be accessed using the INFO menu. If you would like to stop receiving messages, visit the My Acura website at

to change your messaging preferences.

Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.owners. acura.com

CONTINUED

Phone-Data ConnectionNew Message Notification

Auto Reading

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

439

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:38:27 31TK4620_444

2011 TL

The default setting is prompt. When a diagnostic info message appears, and you select the Check Now option, the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server. If you do not wish to connect at that time, select No at the prompt, and you will see the information from the onboard database. The Auto setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the Acura server. This setting only applies when you have a enabled phone that is paired with HFL and you have completed the Phone-Data Connection setup.

To find more information on compatible and enabled

cell phones, visit or call

the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.

Bluetooth

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

Connect to the Acura Server

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

440

10/07/29 12:38:32 31TK4620_445

2011 TL

Refer to the navigation system manual for operation of the rearview camera.

On models with navigation system

Rearview Camera and Monitor F

eatures

441

10/07/29 12:38:35 31TK4620_446

2011 TL

442

10/07/29 12:38:37 31TK4620_447

2011 TL

Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 444 .................Fuel Recommendation . 444

.........Service Station Procedures . 445 ....................................Refueling . 445

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 447 Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 447 ...................................Oil Check . 448

.............Engine Coolant Check . 449 ...............................Fuel Economy . 450

...Accessories and Modifications . 453 .............................Carrying Cargo . 455

Before Driving B

efore D

riving

443

10/07/29 12:38:41 31TK4620_448

2011 TL

Help assure your vehicles future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period:

You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until the multi-information display indicates it is needed.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.

You may hear a knocking noise from the engine if you drive the vehicle at low engine speed (below about 1,000 rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this, raise the engine speed by shifting to a lower gear.

On vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

444

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely af f ect perf ormance, and cause the malf unction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your dealer f or service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent f uel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good perf ormance, f uel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmf ul manganese- based f uel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

10/08/03 20:56:58 31TK4620_449

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Park with the drivers side closest to the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pressing the button in the drivers door (to open the fuel fill door manually, see page ).

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit My Acura at

. In Canada, visit for additional

information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit

.

Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

1.

2.

564

owners.acura.com www.acura.ca

www.toptiergas.com

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

B efore

D riving

445

Push

10/08/03 20:57:04 31TK4620_450

2011 TL

Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi- information display. If the system still detects an evaporative system leak after retightening the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicles fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank equalizes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

The fuel fill cap is attached to the fuel fill door with a tether to avoid losing the cap.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to top off the tank. This leaves some room in the fuel tank for the fuel to expand with temperature changes.

3.

4.

5.

6.

562

Service Station Procedures

446

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

HOLDER

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

10/07/29 12:39:08 31TK4620_451

2011 TL

Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off.

Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go

off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another message, press the INFO button.

Your vehicles on board diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi-information display.

If the system still detects a leak in your vehicles evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page .

1.

562

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedure

Opening and Closing the HoodTighten Fuel Cap Message

B efore

D riving

447

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

10/07/29 12:39:16 31TK4620_452

2011 TL

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole.

Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

To close the hood, lower it to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then press down firmly with your hands. Make sure the hood is securely latched.

Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Put your fingers between the front edge of the hood and the front grille to locate the hood latch handle. Push this handle up until it releases the hood. Lift the hood.

3.

1.

3.

2.

2.

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

448

LATCH

DIPSTICK

10/07/29 12:39:26 31TK4620_453

2011 TL

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark, see on page .

To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).

See page for the engine coolant location.

Refer to on page for information

about checking other items on your vehicle.

Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see

on page for information on adding the proper coolant.

4.

509 512

507

505

508

Service Station Procedures

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Check

Owners Maintenance Checks

Adding Engine Coolant

B efore

D riving

449

MIN

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX RESERVE TANK

10/07/29 12:39:34 31TK4620_454

2011 TL

Fuel economy is not a fixed number. It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.

Represents urban driving in light traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates include:

Represents a combination of city and highway driving. The scale represents the range of combined fuel economy for other vehicles in the class.

Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, typical of longer trips in free-flowing

traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuel cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000

km) per year multiplied by the cost per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost data) divided by the combined fuel economy.

For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit )

www. fueleconomy.gov www. vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison.

City MPG Combined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

Fuel Economy

450

Combined Fuel Economy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

10/07/29 12:39:43 31TK4620_455

2011 TL

Aggressive driving (hard acceleration and braking) Excessive idling, accelerating and braking in stop-and-go traffic Cold engine operation (engines are more efficient when warmed up) Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running Improperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower your vehicles fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy. Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance

messages displayed on the information display (see

on page ). For example:

Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking increase fuel consumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel economy at speeds above 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag. Trailers, car top carriers, roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.

Idling results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms per liter).

It puts a heavier load on the engine, increasing fuel consumption.

In particular, a build-up of snow or mud on your vehicles underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy.

An underinflated tire increases rolling resistance, which reduces fuel economy.

505

CONTINUED

Fuel Economy Factors

Use the recommended viscosity motor oil, displaying the API Certif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owners Maintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gear possible

Avoid excessive idling

Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Maintain proper tire inflation

509

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy B

efore D

riving

451

10/07/29 12:39:57 31TK4620_456

2011 TL

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off. Reset trip counter to zero. Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill. Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.

Combine several short trips into one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy. Using frequency of fill-ups or taking fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy. Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles (kilometers).

1) 2) 3) 4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the air conditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

452

Miles per Gallon

100 Kilometers

Gallons of fuel

Miles driven

Liter L per 100 km

10/07/29 12:40:06 31TK4620_457

2011 TL

Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory: Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.

Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page ) or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicles computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system.

Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Acura accessories, can make your vehicle unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.

565 Accessories

Accessories and Modifications B

efore D

riving

453

Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

10/07/29 12:40:14 31TK4620_458

2011 TL

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non- Acura components could seriously affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.

Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.

Non-Acura wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and will not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicles anti-lock brakes and other systems.

Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicles safety features can make the systems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

454

10/07/29 12:40:21 31TK4620_459

2011 TL

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:

Glove box Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk Console compartment Center and side pockets

In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

455

TRUNK

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SIDE POCKET

10/07/29 12:40:29 31TK4620_460

2011 TL

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models and 395 kg for Canadian models.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

456

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

10/07/29 12:40:41 31TK4620_461

2011 TL

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of the trunk panel. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

: Canadian models

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Compartment

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

457

Max Load 850 lbs (395 kg)

Max Load 850 lbs (395 kg)

Max Load 850 lbs (395 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs (68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 550 lbs (259 kg)

Cargo Weight 250 lbs (123 kg)

Cargo Weight 100 lbs (55 kg)

10/07/29 12:40:55 31TK4620_462

2011 TL

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll underneath and interfere with the proper operation of the seats, the sensors under the seats, or the drivers ability to operate the pedals.

Keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows. If it is higher, it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.

Cargo hook buttons in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.

The cargo net can be used to help hold down items stored in the trunk.

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of

, follow the instructions on page .57

If equipped Cargo Nets

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Cargo Hook Buttons

carbon monoxide poisoning

Carrying Cargo

458

CARGO HOOK BUTTON

10/07/29 12:41:05 31TK4620_463

2011 TL

This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the manual and automatic transmissions. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) system, vehicle stability assist (VSA ), aka electronic stability control (ESC), system, and the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

........................Preparing to Drive . 460 Starting the Engine

(Models without Keyless .....................Access System) . 461

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless

.....................Access System) . 463 ...................Manual Transmission . 465

..............Automatic Transmission . 468 Driving with the Paddle

.......................................Shifters . 473 Super Handling-All Wheel

...Drive (SH-AWD ) System . 478 ...........................................Parking . 480

.............................Braking System . 481 ...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 482

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability

........Control (ESC), System . 484 .........................Hill Start Assist . 486

Tire Pressure Monitoring ........................System (TPMS) . 488

...........................Towing a Trailer . 493 ...................Towing Your Vehicle . 493

Driving D

riving

459

TM

TM

10/08/03 20:57:08 31TK4620_464

2011 TL

Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.

Check the seat adjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page ).

Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securely closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see pages ,

).

You should do these checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle:

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure.

Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

3.

2.

1. 7.

8.

9.

4.

5.

6. 155

63 75

16

161

140

10.

11.

Preparing to Drive

460

10/07/29 12:41:18 31TK4620_465

and 77

2011 TL

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, then release the ignition switch. You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the

starter motor runs for about 6 to 9 seconds until the engine starts.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

If you hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System) D

riving

461

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

143

10/07/29 12:41:25 31TK4620_466

2011 TL

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignition switch has to be held in the START (III) position manually until the engine starts. The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check Starting System Message

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)

462

10/07/29 12:41:30 31TK4620_467

2011 TL

If you hold the engine start/stop button for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for

about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, push and release the engine start/stop button. You do not need to hold the engine start/stop button to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the starter motor runs for about 6 to 9 seconds until the engine starts.

The keyless access remote battery becomes weak or dead.

The keyless access remote system main switch is off.

In either of the following cases, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot. For more information, see pages

and . If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you have your keyless access remote and push the engine start/stop button while depressing the brake pedal (A/T) or clutch pedal (M/T), this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal down all the way. The power mode from ON to START does not function unless the clutch pedal is pressed.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.1.

2.

3.

4.

188 189

Automatic transmission:

Manual transmission:

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System) D

riving

463

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

143

10/07/29 12:41:40 31TK4620_468

2011 TL

If you cannot start the engine using the normal engine start procedure, do the following:

Set the parking brake.

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display with the power mode ON. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, you should press and hold the engine start/stop button until the engine starts. The engine start/stop button can be pressed up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to select the power mode. For more information, see page .

Do not follow this procedure unless it is a case of emergency. Even if you can start the engine using this method, the system may have a malfunction. Contact your dealer as soon as possible.

Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for about 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal (automatic) or the clutch pedal (manual).

Press the engine start/stop button to turn on the ACCESSORY mode.

Put the shift lever into Park.

178

1.

2.

3.

4.

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)

Emergency Engine StartCheck Starting System Message

464

10/07/29 12:41:50 31TK4620_469

2011 TL

When shifting up or down, make sure you push the clutch pedal down all the way, shift to the next gear, and let the pedal up gradually. When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shift into reverse. You can damage the transmission by trying to shift into reverse with the vehicle moving. Push down the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into reverse, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they wont grind.

When slowing down, you can get extra braking from the engine by shifting to a lower gear. This extra braking can help you maintain a safe speed and prevent your brakes from overheating while going down a steep hill. Before downshifting, make sure the engine speed will not go into the tachometers red zone in the lower gear.

The manual transmission is synchronized in all forward gears for smooth operation. It has a lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed (see page ).467

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission D

riving

465

Rapid slowing or speeding up can cause loss of control on slippery surfaces. If you crash, you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving on slippery surfaces.

10/07/29 12:41:57 31TK4620_470

2011 TL

Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly. This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (28 km/h) 27 mph (44 km/h) 36 mph (58 km/h) 41 mph (66 km/h) 44 mph (71 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometers red zone.

Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

466

10/07/29 12:42:03 31TK4620_471

2011 TL

Press the clutch pedal, and shift to

The manual transmission has a lockout so you cannot accidentally shift from any forward gear to reverse while the vehicle is moving at a certain speed. If you cannot shift to reverse when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

With the clutch pedal pressed, move the shift lever to the first/ second gear side of the neutral gate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift to reverse, apply the parking brake, and select the ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode (see page ).

With the clutch pedal still pressed fully, press the engine start/stop button to start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure to shift to reverse, your vehicle may be developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

179

Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission D

riving

467

Move the shift lever in sequence.

10/07/29 12:42:10 31TK4620_472

reverse.

2011 TL

These indicators between the tachometer and speedometer show which position the shift lever is in.

Using a paddle shift mode, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number (see page ).

The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi-information display.

:

178 181

473

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission

468

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR on PADDLE SHIFT MODE

10/07/29 12:42:18 31TK4620_473

2011 TL

This position mechani- cally locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the front of the shift lever to move it.

To shift from Park to any position, press firmly on the brake pedal, and press the release button on the front of the shift lever, then move the lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .178

:

181

Do this: Press the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to P N to R D to S S to D D to N N to D R to N

CONTINUED

Shifting

Park (P)

Automatic Transmission D

riving

469

RELEASE BUTTON

10/07/29 12:42:26 31TK4620_474

2011 TL

If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see on page .

Press the brake pedal and the release button on the front of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop, and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.

Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 5) for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher engine speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster.

You must also press the release button to shift into Park. To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park.

The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

The shift lever must be in Park before you change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

471

On models with keyless access system

On models without keyless access system

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Automatic Transmission

470

10/07/29 12:42:32 31TK4620_475

2011 TL

To shift into the S position, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, and move the lever to S. This position is similar to D, except only gears from first to fourth are selected. The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.

With the shift lever in D or S, you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down. With the paddle shifters, you can operate the transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. For more information on driving with the paddle shifters, see page .

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Remove the built-in key from the keyless access remote (see page ).

1.

2.

475 195

CONTINUED

On models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

S Position (S) Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter

Automatic Transmission D

riving

471

10/07/29 12:42:40 31TK4620_476

2011 TL

Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover to prevent scratches. Use a small flat-tip screwdriver or metal fingernail file to carefully pry up the edge of the cover and remove it from the slot.

Insert a key or built-in key in the shift lock release slot.

Push down on the key or built-in key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.

Remove the key or built-in key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the rear side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

3.

6.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission

472

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Vehicle without keyless access system is shown.

10/07/29 12:42:47 31TK4620_477

2011 TL

When you are driving in the D position, you can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.

Each time you pull (right), the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull (left) to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel.

To shift up or down, use the (right) or (left) paddle shifter on either side of the steering wheel.

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm.

When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number.

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shifters in the D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only) D

riving

473

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:42:54 31TK4620_478

2011 TL

The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions. When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving, the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters. Under these conditions, D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode (D).

You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters, the D indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission returns to drive mode (D).

Each time you pull either paddle shifter, the transmission shifts one gear up or down. If you want to shift up or down more than two gears, pull the paddle shifter twice, pause, and then pull it again.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Hold the paddle shifter for 2 seconds to return to drive mode (D).

When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number disappears.

The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate.

The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode (D) when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 9 mph (15 km/h).

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)

474

10/07/29 12:43:02 31TK4620_479

2011 TL

When you move the shift lever from D to S and pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator displays M along with the selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddle shifter. To downshift, pull the (left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear, and you must manually upshift between first and fifth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometers red zone.

With the shift lever in the S position, you can manually shift up or down with the paddle shifters. The transmission goes into the sequential shift mode and holds the selected gear.

To enter the sequential shift mode, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, move the lever to the S position, then pull either paddle shifter. To return to drive mode (D), move the shift lever to the D position. While you are driving in the sequential shift mode, the transmission will not automatically return to drive mode (D).

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shifters in the S position (Sequential Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only) D

riving

475

M INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

10/07/29 12:43:09 31TK4620_480

2011 TL

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

If the vehicle speed decreases below the redline of the selected lower gear while the indicator is flashing, the transmission downshifts, and the indicator displays the selected gear.

You upshift before the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

You downshift before the engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm.

The transmission remains in the selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5th gear, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions:

The vehicle slows down to a certain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)

476

10/07/29 12:43:18 31TK4620_481

2011 TL

When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, pull the (right) paddle shifter to shift to second gear. You will see M2 in the display. Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.

Drive in the highest gear that lets the engine run and accelerate smoothly. This will give you good fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 40 mph (64 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)

Starting in Second Gear Recommended Shift Points

D riving

477

10/07/29 12:43:23 31TK4620_482

2011 TL

The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi-information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels. Each wheel right front (RF), left front (LF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR) has its own torque indicator.

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments. The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving, such as cruising on level roads at the same speed, the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque. This is not a system problem. The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution.

While the SH-AWD system helps to enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations, it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The super handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system is a full time all- wheel-drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently, according to the driving conditions.

If equipped SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System

478

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

TM

10/07/29 12:43:30 31TK4620_483

2011 TL

Your vehicle still has normal front- wheel drive with vehicle stability assist (VSA), but does not have the advantages of SH-AWD. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the SH-AWD indicator begins to blink while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high.

You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display.

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, park the vehicle and shift to Park (automatic), and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

If the SH-AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on, and the CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message also appears on the multi- information display, there is problem with the SH-AWD system.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System D

riving

479

TM

10/07/29 12:43:36 31TK4620_484

2011 TL

Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.

If you are unable to stop the engine normally when the vehicle is parked (in the Park position on the automatic transmission models), see on page .186

On models with keyless access system

Parking Tips

Emergency Engine Stop

Parking

480

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:43:45 31TK4620_485

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The emergency brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life. In addition, fuel economy can be reduced. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

Check your brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.

All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System D

riving

481

10/07/29 12:43:52 31TK4620_486

2011 TL

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page .

When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.

563

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

482

10/07/29 12:43:58 31TK4620_487

2011 TL

If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the EBD system may also be shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed on page . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control.

such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose

gravel or snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock.

It only helps with the steering control during braking.

563

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability.

A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) D

riving

483

10/07/29 12:44:04 31TK4620_488

or uneven surfaces ,such as

2011 TL

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engines output, and by selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicles entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFF indicator comes on as a reminder.

When VSA activates, you will see the VSA system indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on while driving, you will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM and/or CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. Drive cautiously as the VSA may not be functioning. Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. Also, the VSA OFF switch will not operate. Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on,

have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system. You will also see the VSA system indicator blink.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

484

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:44:12 31TK4620_489

2011 TL

This switch is under the drivers side vent. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFF indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (see page ), or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message with the indicator flashing (see page ), the VSA system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.

If there is a problem with the hill start assist system, the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on. The multi-information display shows a CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message.

With the VSA system indicator on, you may not be able to stop the engine even if you park the vehicle safely. To stop the engine, see

on page .186

487

491

CONTINUED

On models with SH-AWD

On models with keyless access system

VSA OFF Switch

Emergency Engine Stop

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

riving

485

VSA OFF SWITCH

10/07/29 12:44:20 31TK4620_490

2011 TL

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would

Your vehicle is equipped with a hill start assist feature to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

To activate hill start assist, you must come to a complete stop and make sure the shift lever is either in D or S when facing uphill, or reverse when facing downhill. This feature begins working a few seconds after you are in the correct gear position. Release the brake pedal. The brakes remain engaged briefly to keep the vehicle from rolling forward or backward. Gently apply the accelerator pedal as in normal driving. Hill start assist will release brake pressure gradually as you accelerate.

540

On models with SH-AWD

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist

486

10/07/29 12:44:28 31TK4620_491

if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA.

2011 TL

Hill start assist may not prevent your vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. If parking your vehicle, ensure that the transmission is in park, and/or the parking brake is fully applied before exiting the vehicle. For vehicles with manual transmission, it is recommended that you turn off the engine before exiting the vehicle.

If the VSA system indicator comes on with a CHECK HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there may be a problem with the hill start assist. The VSA also may not function. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer.

Hill start assist will still operate even when VSA is switched off.

On manual transmission models: You must come to a complete stop, press the clutch pedal, and shift to first gear when facing uphill, or reverse when facing downhill. Release the brake pedal. The brakes remain engaged briefly to keep the vehicle from rolling forward or backward while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Gently apply the accelerator pedal while simultaneously releasing the clutch pedal, as in normal driving. Hill start assist will release brake pressure gradually as you accelerate.

Hill start assist will also hold braking briefly if you select the neutral gear position with the clutch pedal depressed when facing uphill.

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

riving

487

10/07/29 12:44:33 31TK4620_492

2011 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.

If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure shown on the drivers doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly.

When the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicles tire information placard.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi- information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.

It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi-information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different.

If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator and message on the multi-information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

549

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

488

10/07/29 12:44:41 31TK4620_493

2011 TL

Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle is cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owners manual (see \

).

For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflation guidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, this indicator begins to flash. It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute, then stays on. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

To select the tire pressure monitor, press the INFO button several times with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position or with the power mode ON.

You will see the above display on the multi-information display when each tire pressure is normal.

491

535

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

489

U.S. model

10/07/29 12:44:49 31TK4620_494

page 536

2011 TL

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian models).

If any of the tires has low pressure, the tire pressure monitor also shows the above message and each tire pressure to warn you about the low tire pressure when you select the display by pressing the INFO button several times.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi- information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 181

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

490

Canadian model U.S. model Canadian model

10/07/29 12:44:56 31TK4620_495

2011 TL

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the tire pressure monitor shows a TPMS ERROR message and the tire pressure readings are not displayed. If this happens, you will first see a system warning message CHECK TPMS SYSTEM on the multi-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, you will see the above message on the multi-information display.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator begins to flash, then stays on (see page ).

If you see this message, the system is off and is not monitoring the tire pressures. Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, or the multi- information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS system message will also be displayed on the multi-information display after several miles (kilometers) driving.

485

488

TPMS System Failure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

491

U.S. model Canadian model

10/07/29 12:45:05 31TK4620_496

2011 TL

Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator and the warning message on the multi-information display will go off, after several miles (kilometers) driving, when the spare tire is replaced with the specified regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician.

If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and tire monitor indicator will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator stays on while driving. After several miles (kilometers) driving, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. This is normal; the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the low tire position on the low tire pressure monitor do not go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

549

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

492

10/07/29 12:45:11 31TK4620_497

2011 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page .572

Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle D

riving

493

10/07/29 12:45:18 31TK4620_498

2011 TL

494

10/07/29 12:45:20 31TK4620_499

2011 TL

This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.

This section also includes instructions on how to read the Maintenance Minder messages on the multi-information display, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

U.S. Vehicles: ......................Maintenance Safety . 496 .................Maintenance Minder . 497

..............................Fluid Locations . 507 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 508

........................Adding Engine Oil . 509 Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 510 ..............................Engine Coolant . 512

....................Windshield Washers . 514 .......................Transmission Fluid . 515

..........Automatic Transmission . 515 ..............Manual Transmission . 517

..................Brake and Cluth Fluid . 519 ....................................Timing Belt . 520

.............................................Lights . 521 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 530

.....................................Floor Mats . 531 ..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 532

.................................Exterior Care . 532

.................................Wiper Blades . 532 ...............................................Tires . 534

...................Checking the Battery . 542 .............................Vehicle Storage . 544

..................................Interior Care . 545

599

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are certif ied to EPA standards.

M aintenance

495

TM

10/07/29 12:45:26 31TK4620_500

2011 TL

To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.

All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.

Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts.

Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so.

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

496

Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations in this owners manual.

Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

10/07/29 12:45:36 31TK4620_501

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Your vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the multi-information display to show you when you should have your dealer perform engine oil replacement and indicated maintenance service.

To see the current engine oil life displayed on the multi-information display, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

Based on the engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage.

:

178 181

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Indicator

M aintenance

497

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S. model is shown.

TM

10/07/29 12:45:43 31TK4620_502

2011 TL

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.

Along with the message, the system message indicator comes on (see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance item code(s) indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.

The remaining engine oil life is shown on the multi-information display according to this table:

The message appears on the multi- information display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

72

:

178 181 506

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100% 91% 90% 81% 80% 71% 70% 61% 60% 51% 50% 41% 40% 31% 30% 21% 20% 16% 15% 11% 10% 6% 5% 1%

0%

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0%

Maintenance Minder

498

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)

TM

10/07/29 12:45:50 31TK4620_503

2011 TL

CONTINUED

When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the same maintenance items SERVICE DUE SOON was displayed with. When you see this message, have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life information. Along with the OIL LIFE message, you will see the percentage of the remaining engine oil life and the maintenance item codes on the multi-information display.

This message reminds you that your vehicle will soon be due for scheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

499

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODEMAIN ITEM(S) SUB ITEM(S)

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)

TM

10/07/29 12:45:56 31TK4620_504

2011 TL

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 5%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 1 to 5 percent (see page ).

If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0%, the multi- information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code(s). This message is displayed when the total distance traveled is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after the engine oil life became 0%.

498

Maintenance Minder

500

TM

10/07/29 12:46:01 31TK4620_505

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 0%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 to 1 percent.

These messages will come on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0%, the multi- information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message, the total distance traveled after the remaining oil life became 0%, and the maintenance item code(s).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .

:

178 181

503

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

501

U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED

MAINTENANCE CODES

Canada

TM

10/07/29 12:46:09 31TK4620_506

2011 TL

This message is displayed again when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.

All maintenance items shown on the multi-information display are in code. For an explanation of these maintenance codes, see page .

When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life, the message SERVICE, along with the maintenance item code(s) and the total negative distance traveled after the oil life became 0%, will be displayed on the multi-information display.

501

506

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items

502

U.S.

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED

Canada

TM

10/07/29 12:46:18 31TK4620_507

2011 TL

Select RESET by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to reset the engine oil life display. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to 100. If you want to cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL.

Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see OIL LIFE 100% on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the Maintenance Minder as follows:

If the engine oil life is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly.

Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi- information display.

3.

1.

2.

4.

:

178 181

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display

M aintenance

503

TM

10/07/29 12:46:26 31TK4620_508

2011 TL

Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or Canadian Maintenance Log. Check your warranty booklet for more information.

If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the correct maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.

We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high- quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi- information display.

U.S. Vehicles:

Maintenance Minder

Important Maintenance Precautions

504

TM

10/07/29 12:46:31 31TK4620_509

2011 TL

You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.

Lights Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate lights monthly. See page .

Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission

.

Brakes Check the fluid level monthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See

.

448

449

515

519

521

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Owners Maintenance Checks

M aintenance

505

TM

10/07/29 12:46:39 31TK4620_510

Check the fluid level monthly. See page

page 534

2011 TL

Maintenance Minder

506

:

TM

If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Adjust the valves during service 3 if they are noisy.

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

2 :

1 :

SH-AWD only

504

Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil Replace engine oil and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and line (including ABS/VSA) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid Replace transmission and transfer fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under

20F, 29C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/ 100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

A B

Symbol Symbol

3

4

5

1 2

6

1

1

2

2

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

10/07/29 12:46:47 31TK4620_511

2011 TL

Fluid Locations M

aintenance

507

WASHER FLUID (Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)

: Located under the cover

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)

ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID (Manual Transmission only) (Light gray cap)

10/07/29 12:46:50 31TK4620_512

2011 TL

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by several covers. You may need to remove the covers when you perform some simple maintenance work.

When reinstalling the covers, make sure the pins and tabs are in their proper positions.

To remove the covers:

Remove the right and left engine compartment covers by sliding them apart.

Pull the bulkhead cover straight up to remove. When removing the cover, make sure to move the bulkhead cover slightly to the left so that the hood latch handle does not get in the way.

After replacing the right engine compartment cover, make sure the washer fluid cap is firmly in place.

1.

2.

Engine Compartment Covers

508

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER

BULKHEAD COVER

LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER

10/07/29 12:46:57 31TK4620_513

2011 TL

Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment. Install the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level (see page ). Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says For Gasoline Engines.

448

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil M

aintenance

509

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

10/07/29 12:47:04 31TK4620_514

2011 TL

You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the multi- information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.

The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the containers label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.

Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled technician.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

510

Ambient Temperature

10/07/29 12:47:11 31TK4620_515

2011 TL

Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it. Make sure to clean off any dirt and dust on the contacting surface of a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the contacting surface of the engine. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

3.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter M

aintenance

511

OIL FILTER

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

10/07/29 12:47:21 31TK4620_516

2011 TL

Always use Honda Long-life Anti- freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent distilled water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine and check your work.

Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.

If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).

7.

8.

9.

508

Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

512

RESERVE TANK

MINMAX

Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container, and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.

10/07/29 12:47:30 31TK4620_517

as possible.

2011 TL

The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).

When the radiator and engine are cool, relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on and tighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Reinstall the engine compartment covers.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

6.

7.

508

Engine Coolant M

aintenance

513

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

10/07/29 12:47:40 31TK4620_518

2011 TL

Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.

If the washer fluid is low, a LOW WASHER FLUID message appears on the multi-information display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges.

To check washer fluid level, cover the reservoir cap center hole with your finger while lifting the cap and the attached measuring tube. The washer fluid level in the tube will indicate the washer fluid level in the reservoir.

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

514

TUBE

Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicles paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.

10/07/29 12:47:48 31TK4620_519

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.

Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.

1.

2. 3.

4.

Automatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid M

aintenance

515

UPPER MARK LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

10/07/29 12:47:56 31TK4620_520

2011 TL

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the filler hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Always use Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid).

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).

If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.

5. 6.

497

Transmission Fluid

516

TM

Use only Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission f luid). Do not mix with other transmission f luids. Using transmission f luid other than Acura ATF DW-1 may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability, and could result in damage to the transmission. Damage resulting f rom the use of transmission f luid other than Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Acura new vehicle warranty.

10/07/29 12:48:03 31TK4620_521

2011 TL

Remove the check bolt and look for transmission fluid coming out of the bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall the check bolt.

Check the fluid level with the transmission at normal operating temperature and the vehicle sitting on level ground.

To check the transmission fluid level, remove the mounting bolt and the under cover holding clips, then pull out the drivers side under cover carefully.

If no fluid comes out, remove the filler bolt. Slowly add Acura Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) until

Pour the fluid into the filler hole slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Let the fluid run out until it stops, then reinstall the check bolt and the filler bolt.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

M aintenance

517

WASHER

CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT

10/07/29 12:48:12 31TK4620_522

it starts to run out of the check bolt hole.

2011 TL

Reinstall the under cover, tighten the mounting bolt securely, then put the holding clips back in place. Make sure the under cover is installed under the edge of the front bumper.

If Acura MTF is not available, you may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity motor oil with the API Certification Seal that says FOR GASOLINE ENGINES as a temporary replacement. However, motor oil does not contain the proper additives, and continued use can cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).

If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.

497

Transmission Fluid

518

TM

10/07/29 12:48:17 31TK4620_523

2011 TL

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

You need to remove the left engine compartment cover to check the fluid level (see page ).

Check the fluid level in the reservoirs monthly. There are up to two reservoirs, depending on the model. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models) Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission models only)

To access the reservoirs, remove the left engine compartment cover (see page ).

You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

508

508

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid

M aintenance

519

MAX

MIN

10/07/29 12:48:26 31TK4620_524

2011 TL

Manual Transmission only

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake fluid to bring it up to that level. Use the same fluid specified for the brake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leak in the clutch system. Have this system inspected as soon as possible.

The timing belt should be replaced according to the Maintenance Minder (see page ).

Replace the timing belt every 60,000 miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km (Canada) if you regularly drive your vehicle in any of the following conditions:

In very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C). In very low temperatures (under 20F, 29C).

497

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Timing Belt

Clutch Fluid Timing Belt

520

MAX

MIN

TM

10/07/29 12:48:34 31TK4620_525

2011 TL

The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen high beam headlight bulbs which are also used for the daytime running light. Handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).

If you are replacing the bulb on the drivers side, remove the three holding clips with a flat-tip screwdriver. Then remove the upper part of the air intake duct by pulling it straight up.

The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode on models with keyless access system). Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.

1.

2. 508

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming

Low Beam Headlight Bulb Replacement

Replacing a High Beam Headlight/Daytime Running Light Bulb

Lights M

aintenance

521

HOLDING CLIP

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

10/07/29 12:48:43 31TK4620_526

2011 TL

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

To change a bulb on the passengers side, remove the engine coolant reserve tank by pulling it out of its stay.

Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.

Install the upper part of the air intake duct securely. Reinstall the holding clips.

(Drivers side)

Install all engine compartment covers.

Install the engine coolant reserve tank.

(Passengers side)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3. 9.

10.

Lights

522

RESERVE TANK BULB

CONNECTORSTAY

10/07/29 12:48:54 31TK4620_527

2011 TL

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the holding clips from the edge of the inner fender cover, and pull the inner fender cover back.

3.2.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Front Side Marker Light Bulb

Lights M

aintenance

523

HOLDING CLIP

HOLDING CLIP

SPOILER

BOLTS

10/07/29 12:49:01 31TK4620_528

2011 TL

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of its socket.

Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Push the under cover in place and set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Put the holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

9.

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/ Parking Light Bulb

Lights

524

SOCKETBULB

10/07/29 12:49:08 31TK4620_529

2011 TL

Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning it counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the three holding clips from the inner fender.

Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.

3.2. 4.

5.

CONTINUED

Lights M

aintenance

525

HOLDING CLIP SOCKETBULBCOVER

HOLDING CLIP

SPOILER

BOLTS

10/07/29 12:49:17 31TK4620_530

2011 TL

Install the new bulb in the socket. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

The fog lights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, readjustment may be required. Adjustment should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Push the under cover in place and set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Put the holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Lights

526

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

10/07/29 12:49:24 31TK4620_531

2011 TL

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it about one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Use a wrench to remove the mounting bolts, and remove the holding clip with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the three holding clips from the inner fender.

4.

5.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Lights M

aintenance

527

HOLDING CLIP

CONNECTOR

BOLTSHOLDING CLIPCOVER BULB

SPOILER

10/07/29 12:49:32 31TK4620_532

2011 TL

Remove the nuts from the stud bolts with a socket or wrench.Open the trunk.

Remove the screw in the center of the holding clip on the side of the trunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.

Push the under cover in place and set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and tighten them securely. Put the holding clip, and lock it by pushing on its center.

1. 2.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

528

SCREW

NUTS

10/07/29 12:49:41 31TK4620_533

2011 TL

Push a new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms, and reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Make sure it is installed under the edge of the trunk seal.

Put the holding clip into the hole on the side of the trunk lining. Reinstall the screw.

Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out: back-up light, turn signal, or side marker.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counter- clockwise, and pull the bulb straight out of its socket.

Pull the taillight assembly straight back out of the body.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

4.3.

Lights M

aintenance

529

BULB SOCKET

10/07/29 12:49:49 31TK4620_534

2011 TL

Each outside mirror has side turn signal lights. The lights should be replaced by your dealer.

This light should be replaced by your dealer.

The license plate has two lights above it. The bulbs should be replaced by your dealer.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up around the openings of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the openings with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Side Turn Signal Lights

High-mount Brake Light

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

Cleaning the Seat Belts

530

OPENING

10/07/29 12:49:57 31TK4620_535

2011 TL

The floor mats that came with your vehicle hook over the floor mat anchors. This keeps the floor mats from sliding forward (possibly interfering with the pedals), or backwards (making the front passengers weight sensors ineffective).

If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Acura floor mats, make sure they fit properly and that they can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

To lock or unlock each anchor, turn the knob.

Make sure the rear floor mats are also properly hooked. If not, the floor mat will interfere with the seat operation and make the front passengers weight sensors ineffective.

Floor Mats M

aintenance

531

FLOOR MAT ANCHORS

DRIVERS SIDE FLOOR MAT REAR PASSENGERS FLOOR MAT

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

FLOOR MAT ANCHOR

10/07/29 12:50:03 31TK4620_536

2011 TL

This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate

Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multi- information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual.

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every 6 months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off the windshield, lifting the drivers side first, then the passengers side.

1.

Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper BladesExterior Care

Dust and Pollen Filter, Exterior Care, Wiper Blades

532

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and wiper arms.

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle.

10/07/29 12:50:11 31TK4620_537

control system.

2011 TL

Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield, the passengers side first, then the drivers side.

Remove the blade from its holder by grabbing the tabbed end of the blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the

Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by pushing in the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in while you push the blade assembly toward the base of the arm.

3. 5.

4.

6.

7.

2.

Wiper Blades M

aintenance

533

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

BLADE LOCK TAB

10/07/29 12:50:19 31TK4620_538

new blade.

2011 TL

However, these tires are not suitable for driving on snow or ice, so all- season or winter tires must be installed for winter driving conditions.

See page for

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with high performance all-season tires (marked All Season or M S on the sidewalls). These tires provide excellent handling and braking performance in most driving situations.

Your vehicle is equipped with high performance summer tires. These tires have a high-traction compound and tread pattern to provide superior acceleration, cornering, and stopping under most driving conditions.

541

All models except SH-AWD model with high performance tires, SH-AWD TECH HPT, and Canadian A-Spec models

SH-AWD model with high performance tires, SH-AWD TECH HPT, and Canadian A-Spec models

Winter Driving.

Tire Types

Tires

534

Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

10/07/29 12:50:26 31TK4620_539

2011 TL

If you check air pressure when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold readings. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be underinflated.

While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.

Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when the tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on the next page.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warns you when a tire pressure is low. See page for more information on the TPMS.

488

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

M aintenance

535

10/07/29 12:50:34 31TK4620_540

2011 TL

The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

For additional technical information, see page .585

Tire Size

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

TL and TECH models

SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

Optional on TECH models

SH-AWD TECH HPT and Canadian A-Spec models

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

536

P245/50R17 98V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V

245/40ZR19 94Y 37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/07/29 12:50:49 31TK4620_541

2011 TL

We strongly recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you ever drive in a sanctioned competitive event at sustained high speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h), be sure to adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below. If you do not, excessive heat can build up and cause sudden tire failure.

Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tire pressure for high speed driving is the same as for normal driving.

Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for High Speed Driving

SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

Except SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

Tires

High Speed Driving Tire Inspection

M aintenance

537

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V Front:

Rear:

10/07/29 12:51:00 31TK4620_542

2011 TL

The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. It is also recommended that all tires, including the spare, be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tire identification number) are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See

on page ).

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.

585

Tires

Tire Service Life

Tire Labeling

Tire Maintenance

538

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

10/07/29 12:51:06 31TK4620_543

2011 TL

To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi-information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of each wheel. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work.

Replacement wheels are available at your dealer.

CONTINUED

Tires

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

M aintenance

539

Front Front

(For Non-directional Tires and Wheels)

(For Directional Tires and Wheels)

10/07/29 12:51:15 31TK4620_544

2011 TL

See page for DOT tire quality grading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all- weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, consult your dealer.

Wheels:

Tires:

1 : 2 :

Optional on TECH models Standard on Canadian A-Spec model

583

585On 2WD Models

On U.S. SH-AWD Models

On SH-AWD Models

On Canadian SH-AWD Models

On 2WD Models

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Winter Driving

Summer Tires

540

17 x 8.0J

19 x 8.0J 18 x 8.0J

18 x 8.0J

245/40ZR19 94Y P245/45R18 96V

P245/50R17 98V

18 x 8.0J

19 x 8.0J

P245/45R18 96V

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

1

1

1, 2

1

1, 2

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

10/07/29 12:51:27 31TK4620_545

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires. Do not use chains on the rear tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using this Quality Chain Corp. tire chain:

This tire chain is available at many auto supply stores. To find a local store that carries the chain, call Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824. To order the tire chain online, go to

, and enter your vehicle information. When you install the chains, follow the manufacturers instructions, and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with the chains installed.

Rubber chain adjusters, or tensioners, must be used to prevent the chains from contacting the body or the chassis.

If you ever hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and investigate. If the chains have loosened, retighten them. Make sure they do not contact the brake lines or suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

:

www.qualitychaincorp.com

Tires

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Premium Cobra Cable Chain 1042P with accessory

adjusters

M aintenance

541

Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

10/07/29 12:51:36 31TK4620_546

2011 TL

Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge. Check the condition of the battery

monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicators colors.

The location of the test indicator window varies between manufacturers.

Tires, Checking the Battery

Wheels Checking the Battery

542

TEST INDICATOR WINDOWTraction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

10/07/29 12:51:43 31TK4620_547

2011 TL

To see the battery label, remove the left side engine compartment cover (see page ).

Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder) after removing all engine compartment covers (see page ). To remove corrosion, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent further corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( ) cable first, and reconnect it last.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the time setting may be lost. To reset the time, see page .

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page ).

The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you set to the ON mode, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.Battery posts,

terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your Acura dealer or a qualified technician.

373

372

508

508

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

M aintenance

543

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance.

10/07/29 12:51:50 31TK4620_548

2011 TL

If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exterior completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in reverse (manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle Storage

544

10/07/29 12:52:00 31TK4620_549

2011 TL

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral wool detergent solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

Interior Care

Leather

M aintenance

545

10/07/29 12:52:03 31TK4620_550

2011 TL

546

10/07/29 12:52:05 31TK4620_551

2011 TL

This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 548 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 549

.............If the Engine Wont Start . 554 ................................Jump Starting . 557

..............If the Engine Overheats . 559 .........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 561 ..........Charging System Indicator . 561

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 562 ...............Brake System Indicator . 563

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ....................................Manually . 564

..............................................Fuses . 565 ..............................Fuse Locations . 569

......................Emergency Towing . 572 ..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 574

Taking Care of the Unexpected T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

547

10/07/29 12:52:08 31TK4620_552

2011 TL

Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the air pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:

Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement tire should be the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving.

Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.

Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the spare, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).491

Compact Spare Tire

548

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/07/29 12:52:16 31TK4620_553

2011 TL

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving, pull over safely. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an area far away from traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park (automatic) or reverse (manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

Open the trunk. Pull up the handle on the trunk floor lid. Raise the lid by lifting it up with the handle, then hook the handle to the trunk opening to keep the lid open.

3.

2.

1.

178 181

:

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

549

HANDLE

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

10/07/29 12:52:24 31TK4620_554

2011 TL

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.

Take the tool case out of the spare tire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well.

Take the jack out of the tool kit case.

Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

7. 8.

6.

4.

5.

Changing a Flat Tire

550

WHEEL NUT WRENCH JACKING POINTEXTENSION

JACK WHEEL NUT WRENCH

10/07/29 12:52:32 31TK4620_555

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.

Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Handle the wheel nuts carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up.

Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.

9. 10. 11.

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

551

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

10/07/29 12:52:39 31TK4620_556

2011 TL

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire in the trunk well.

Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully.

12. 13. 14.

15.

Changing a Flat Tire

552

94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)

10/07/29 12:52:47 31TK4620_557

2011 TL

Store the center cap in the trunk. Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged. Unhook the handle from the trunk opening and lower the trunk floor lid, then close the trunk lid.

Your vehicles original tire has a tire pressure monitoring system sensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(see page ).

Store the jack and tools in the tool kit case. Place the tool kit case in the flat tire.

To remove the spacer cone, squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt to disengage it from the center of the spacer cone, then pull the bolt downward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacer cone, reverse this procedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole.

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt.

18.

19.

20.

21.

17.

16.

492

Changing a Flat Tire

Changing a Tire with TPMS

T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

553

SPACER CONE

TAB SPACER CONE

For compact spare tire

For normal tire

WING BOLT

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

10/07/29 12:52:57 31TK4620_558

2011 TL

Check these things:

When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Diagnosing why the engine wont start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ):

You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engines starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly.

Check the transmission interlock. If you have a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must be pushed all the way to the floor or the starter will not operate. With an automatic transmission, it must be in Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set ON Mode (see page ). Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

178 178

178

557

If the Engine Wont Start

Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

554

10/07/29 12:53:04 31TK4620_559

2011 TL

In this case, the starter motors speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), but the engine does not run.

Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ). If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connec- tions (see page ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page

).

Are you using a properly coded key or keyless access remote (on models with keyless access system)? An improperly coded key or keyless access remote will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page ).65

178

178

542

572

557

CONTINUED

The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Wont Start T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

555

10/07/29 12:53:10 31TK4620_560

2011 TL

Do you have your keyless access system remote with you? The vehicle will not start without the remote within operating range and with the keyless access main switch in the glove box turned on.

Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to

on pages and .

If you are unable to stop the engine normally while in the Park position, see

on page .

You may need to hold the start/ stop button down or hold the key in the START (III) position until the engine starts. It can be held for up to 15 seconds.

If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See

on page .

There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the warning indicator may not be working.

461 463

186

565

572

On models with keyless access system

If the Engine Wont Start

Starting the Engine

Emergency Engine Stop

Emergency Towing

556

NOTE:

10/07/29 12:53:16 31TK4620_561

2011 TL

Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing or pulling it.

Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like ice, do not try jump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electrical accessories: climate control, audio system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake.

Pull up the battery terminal cover to remove. The battery terminal cover can be removed without removing the left side engine compartment cover.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

557

BATTERY TERMINAL COVER

A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.

10/07/29 12:53:25 31TK4620_562

2011 TL

Start the vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ) terminal on your battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.

Once the vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, and then from the booster battery.

Install the battery terminal cover.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Jump Starting

558

10/07/29 12:53:34 31TK4620_563

2011 TL

If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.

The pointer of the vehicles temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see

on page ).

Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in neutral (manual) or Park (automatic), and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.

If the vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.

You will also see a WATER TEMP HOT message on the multi- information display (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

76

572

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

559

Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.

10/07/29 12:53:42 31TK4620_564

2011 TL

If you dont find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark (see on page ).

If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the

before checking the radiator. If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see

on page ).

Start the engine, and set the interior temperature to maximum heat (each temperature control sets to ). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the

proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.

Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.

8.

9.

7.

6.

10.

11.

512

572

Adding Engine Coolant

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats

560

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

10/07/29 12:53:49 31TK4620_565

temperature gauge, or lower,

2011 TL

Safely pull off the road, and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see on

).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.

Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance.

If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged.

This indicator should never come on when the engine is running. If it starts flashing or stays on, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.

You will also see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi-information display when this indicator comes on.

You will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

448

509

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

561

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.

10/07/29 12:53:59 31TK4620_566

page 572

2011 TL

If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may go off as you continue driving, have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon

If this indicator comes on while driving, it means one

of the engines emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicles performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes may be erased. It takes several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on with the D indicator.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once. Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

562

If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicles emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicles warranties.

10/07/29 12:54:06 31TK4620_567

as possible.

2011 TL

If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the systems dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.

You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.

You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- information display when this indicator comes on.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position (set the power mode to ON, on models with keyless access system), without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to for more information (see page ).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page ).

The brake system indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and as a reminder to check the parking brake. It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake.

:

178 181

519

592

CONTINUED

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator

Brake System Indicator

Emissions Testing

T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

563

CanadaU.S.

10/07/29 12:54:14 31TK4620_568

2011 TL

If the fuel fill door release button does not work, use the release lever inside the left maintenance lid in the trunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.

Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired by your dealer as soon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.

If you also cannot unlock the trunk due to the power door lock system malfunction, see page and open the trunk manually.

149

572

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

Emergency Towing

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

564

RELEASE LEVER

MAINTENANCE LID

10/07/29 12:54:22 31TK4620_569

2011 TL

The vehicles fuses are contained in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is located under the dashboard on the drivers side. The fuse label is attached under the steering column.

The passengers side interior fuse box is on the lower passengers side panel. To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, and pull it upward slightly, then pull it toward you and take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on the drivers side next to the air cleaner housing.

To access the under-hood fuse box, remove the left-side engine compartment cover (see page ).

To access the fuse box, turn the knob on the under cover one- quarter turn and pull the front of the cover straight down to remove it from the dashboard.

508

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

565

DRIVERS SIDE PASSENGERS SIDE

NOTCH

TAB

FUSE LABEL

UNDER-HOOD

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

10/07/29 12:54:31 31TK4620_570

2011 TL

If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages

, and , or the diagram on the fuse box lid or the fuse label, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works.

Remove the cover from the

Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off.

3.

1.

2.

:

181178

569 570 571

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

566

FUSE BLOWN

10/07/29 12:54:38 31TK4620_571

fuse box.

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

Also check the combined fuse box in the under-hood fuse box.

5.4.

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

567

BLOWNFUSE PULLERBLOWN

10/07/29 12:54:44 31TK4620_572

2011 TL

If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket).

If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate that anything is wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.

Your vehicle has spare fuses on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

6.

Fuses

568

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES

Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.

10/07/29 12:54:50 31TK4620_573

2011 TL

No. Amps.

No.

CONTINUED

Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

40 A

40 A 15 A 20 A

7.5 A

15 A 15 A 10 A

7.5 A 15 A 15 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4

2 5 2 6

IG Main Sub Fan Motor Sub Fan Motor Drivers Side Fuse Box Main Fan Motor

Drivers Side Light Main Wiper Motor Passengers Side Light Main

3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5

3 6 3 7 3 8

120 A 40 A 70 A 40 A 30 A 40 A

30 A 30 A

50 A 40 A 30 A 60 A 40 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A

Battery Passengers Side Fuse Box EPS ABS/VSA MTR ABS/VSA Passengers Side Fuse Box Option Headlight Washer SH-AWD

Rear Defroster Not Used Not Used Not Used Heater Motor Hazard Horn and Stop Keyless Access System Not Used IG Coil FI Sub Back Up Interior Lights FI Main DBW Back Up FI ECU MG, Clutch Radiator Fan Timer

If equipped

Used on SH-AWD models1 : 2 : 3 :

Used on 2WD models

1

2

1

2

3

1

1

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

569

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

10/07/29 12:54:59 31TK4620_574

2011 TL

No. Amps.

Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedNo.

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

28 29 30 31 32

10 A 7.5 A 15 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A

10 A 7.5 A 15 A

7.5 A

7.5 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

7.5 A 20 A 10 A

SRS Meter ACG Not Used Daytime Running Light A/C Accessory, Key, Lock Accessory Drivers Power Seat Sliding Moonroof Drivers Power Seat Reclining Rear Left Power Window Front ACC Socket Drivers Power Window Drivers Side Door Lock Front Left Fog Light Left Side Small Lights (Exterior) Left Headlight High Beam TPMS Left Headlight Low Beam Not Used STS

Not Used SH-AWD Washer Wiper ODS ABS/VSA Not Used Starter Relay Fuel Pump VB SOL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

: If equipped

Fuse Locations

570

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Drivers side

10/07/29 12:55:05 31TK4620_575

2011 TL

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

1 2

3 4 5 6

10 A 10 A

10 A 15 A

7.5 A

Right Headlight High Beam Right Side Small Lights (Exterior) Right Front Fog Light Right Headlight Low Beam Not Used Interior Lights

20 A

20 A

10 A 20 A

10 A 20 A

20 A 15 A

7.5 A 20 A

7 8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Not Used Passengers Power Seat Reclining Passengers Power Seat Sliding Right Side Door Lock Rear Passengers Side Power Window Keyless Access System Front Passengers Power Window Not Used Premium amplifier Console ACC Socket Not Used Lumbar Support Seat Heater Not Used Not Used Not Used

: If equipped

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

571

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passengers side

10/07/29 12:55:12 31TK4620_576

2011 TL

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

There are two ways to tow your vehicle:

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required.

If, due to damage, your vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do this:

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground.

Start the engine. Shift to the D position and hold for 5 seconds, then to N. Turn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .178 181

:

On SH-AWD models

Except SH-AWD models

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.The only way you can safely tow

your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment.

This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

572

Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

10/07/29 12:55:22 31TK4620_577

2011 TL

With the front wheels on the ground, it is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with a front spoiler, remove it before towing so it is not damaged.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .178 181

:

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

573

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.

Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shif t the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), your vehicle must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the ground.

The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.

On models with the Keyless Access system, the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON indicator will conf irm that the power mode is in the ACCESSORY mode and that the steering lock is released. If the steering wheel does not turn f reely, rotate the wheel right and lef t while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON. This inf ormation also appears on the multi- inf ormation display (see page ).183

10/07/29 12:55:29 31TK4620_578

2011 TL

To use the towing hook:

Remove the cover from the front bumper using your fingers, or pry it off using a cloth and a flat-tip screwdriver to prevent scratches.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow, call a towing service to pull it out (see page ).

For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.

When you need to release the steering lock while your vehicles battery is dead, do this:

Follow the proper jump starting procedures, Step 1 through Step 5, to apply the power to your vehicle (see pages and ).

Follow the jump starting procedures, Step 8 and Step 9, and the instructions to disconnect the jumper cable (see page ). The steering will remain unlocked even if the battery is dead.

Failure to comply means the steering lock may be damaged.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the power mode to ACCESSORY (see page ) and verify the steering lock is released.

Remove the towing hook and wheel nut wrench from the tool case in the spare tire (see

).

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

178

557 558

558

572

On models with keyless access system If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

574

10/07/29 12:55:38 31TK4620_579

page 550

2011 TL

Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

575

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook f or straight, f lat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

10/07/29 12:55:43 31TK4620_580

2011 TL

576

10/07/29 12:55:46 31TK4620_581

2011 TL

The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicles tires and emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 578 ................................Specifications . 580

DOT Tire Quality Grading ..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 583

.................................Tire Labeling . 585 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal ............................Explanation . 587

.......................Emissions Controls . 589 Three Way Catalytic

.................................Converters . 591 ........................Emissions Testing . 592

Technical Information T echnicalInform

ation

577

10/07/29 12:55:49 31TK4620_582

2011 TL

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the drivers side. It is also on the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

578

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

10/07/29 12:55:53 31TK4620_583

2011 TL

The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped into the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers T echnicalInform

ation

579

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

10/07/29 12:55:57 31TK4620_584

2011 TL

Specifications

580

Air Conditioning

Seating Capacities

Weights

Dimensions Capacities

195.5 in (4,966 mm) 18.5 US gal (70 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 ) Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

6.1 US qt (5.8 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.48 US qt (0.45 ) 0.45 US qt (0.43 )

2.93 US qt (2.77 ) 2.67 US qt (2.53 )

ND-OIL8 17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

HFC-134a (R-134a)Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type

Total Front Rear 3

2 5

See the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

63.8 in (1,620 mm) 63.2 in (1,605.5 mm) 109.3 in (2,775 mm) 57.2 in (1,452 mm) 74.0 in (1,880 mm)

Length

Width Height Wheelbase Track

196.4 in (4,989 mm) 1.66 US gal (6.3 ) 2.19 US gal (8.3 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 ) 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) 5.3 US qt (5.0 )

3.5 US qt (3.3 ) 3.0 US qt (2.8 )

7.9 US qt (7.5 ) 8.1 US qt (7.7 ) 2.2 US qt (2.1 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Fuel tank

Engine coolant Engine oil

Automatic transmission fluid

Manual transmission fluid Rear differential fluid (SH-AWD) Transfer assembly fluid (SH-AWD) Windshield washer reservoir

Approx.

Front Rear

Change Total

Change Total

Change Total Change

Including filter Without filter

Total Change

Total

U.S. Vehicle Canada Vehicle

2WD SH-AWD

2WD SH-AWD

1 :

2 :

Change Total

U.S. Vehicle Canada Vehicle

1

2

10/07/29 12:56:15 31TK4620_585

2011 TL

CONTINUED

Specifications T echnicalInform

ation

581

Engine (2WD)

Engine (SH-AWD)

Fuses

Battery

Lights

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

212 cu-in (3,471 cm ) 11.2 : 1

ILZKR7B11

Type

Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

Type

Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

SXU22HCR11S

11.2 : 1 223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )

3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC IN/EX VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

SXU22HCR11

ILZKR7B-11S

Interior

Under-hoodCapacity 12 V 12 V

72 AH/20 HR 60 AH/5 HR

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights, replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.

Headlight (Low beam ) Headlight (High beam/DRL) Front turn signal/parking lights Front side marker lights Front fog lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up lights Rear side marker lights Stop/taillights Side turn signal lights High-mount brake light License plate lights Trunk light Door courtesy lights Vanity mirror lights Console compartment light Glove box Light Foot light

See pages 570 or the fuse label attached on the side panel. See pages 571 or the fuse label attached to the inside of the fuse box door. See page 569 or the fuse box cover.

35 W (D2S) 60 W (HB3) 24/2.2 CP

3 CP 55 W (H11) 21 W 16 W 3 CP

3 CP 5 W 3.4 W 1.4 W 1.4 W 1.4 W DENSO:

NGK:

NGK:

DENSO:

1 :

2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.

LED

Drivers side

Passengers side

LED LED LED

(Amber)

(Amber)

1

2

2

2

2

10/07/29 12:56:34 31TK4620_586

2011 TL

Specifications

582

Tires

Alignment

Size

Pressure

P245/50R17 98V P245/45R18 96V 245/40ZR19 94Y

T135/80D17 103M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm )

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 3.8 1

0.5 0.08 in (2.0 mm) 0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Front/Rear

Spare Front

Rear Spare

TL TECH SH-AWD SH-AWD TECH SH-AWD TECH HPT SH-AWD with high performance tires

Front Rear Front Rear Front

Optional for TECH (2WD)

1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : 6 : 7 : 8 : Canadian A-Spec

1, 2

1, 2, 3, 4

3, 4, 7

5, 6, 8

5, 6, 8

10/07/29 12:56:44 31TK4620_587

2011 TL

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) T echnicalInform

ation

583

10/07/29 12:56:51 31TK4620_588

2011 TL

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

584

10/07/29 12:56:56 31TK4620_589

2011 TL

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Below is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width).

Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

P

R

17

245

50

V

98

CONTINUED

Tire Size

Tire Labeling T echnicalInform

ation

585

Tire Size

(1)

(1)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) (3) Maximum Tire Pressure (4) Maximum Tire Load

(2)(3)

(4)

(2) (1)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

P245/50R17 98V

10/07/29 12:57:07 31TK4620_590

2011 TL

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Manufacturers identification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202 Year Week

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Glossary of Tire Terminology

Tire Labeling

586

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

10/07/29 12:57:17 31TK4620_591

2011 TL

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation T echnicalInform

ation

587

10/07/29 12:57:24 31TK4620_592

2011 TL

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

588

10/07/29 12:57:29 31TK4620_593

2011 TL

The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work.

The burning of gasoline in your vehicles engine produces several by- products. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Con- trolling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environ- ment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog. Carbon monoxide does not contri- bute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are manufactured.

The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.

Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engines crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned.

The Clean Air Act

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery

Evaporative Emissions Control

Crankcase Emissions Control

Emissions Controls T echnicalInform

ation

589

10/07/29 12:57:37 31TK4620_594

System

System

2011 TL

The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engines combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.

The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more information.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) in automatic transmission vehicles or the engine control module (ECM) in manual transmission vehicles uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.

The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.

This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions Controls

590

10/07/29 12:57:46 31TK4620_595

Recirculation (EGR) System

2011 TL

Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic converters contain precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converters are referred to as three-way catalysts, since they act on HC, CO, and NOx. Replacement units must be original Acura parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic converters must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. They can set on fire any combustible materials that come near them. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.

Defective three way catalytic converters contribute to air pollution, and can impair your engines performance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicles three way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converters ineffective.

Three Way Catalytic Converters T echnicalInform

ation

591

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

10/07/29 12:57:53 31TK4620_596

2011 TL

Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.

Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95F (4 and 35C).

Keep the vehicle in Park (automatic) or neutral (manual). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, let the engine idle for 20 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

592

10/07/29 12:58:01 31TK4620_597

2011 TL

Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes.

Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing T echnicalInform

ation

593

10/07/29 12:58:06 31TK4620_598

2011 TL

594

10/07/29 12:58:07 31TK4620_599

2011 TL

..........Client Service Information . 596 ....................Warranty Coverages . 597

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 598 .....................Authorized Manuals . 599

Warranty and Client Relations W

arranty and

C lientR

elations

595

10/07/29 12:58:10 31TK4620_600

2011 TL

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give us this information:

If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealerships management, contact Acura Client Services.

Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealerships management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.

Vehicle Identification Number (see page )

Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele- phone number

A detailed description of the problem

Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:

578

Client Service Information

596

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc. Acura Client Services 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-Mail: ch_acura_cr@ch.honda.com

Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

10/07/29 12:58:17 31TK4620_601

2011 TL

Your new Acura is covered by these warranties:

provides coverage for as long as the pur- chaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.

all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2011 Acura Warranty Information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2011 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty

W arranty

and C

lientR elations

597

10/07/29 12:58:26 31TK4620_602

2011 TL

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE. Washington DC 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to .

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects

In the US In Canada

598

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety

10/07/29 12:58:31 31TK4620_603

2011 TL

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)

Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual: A uthorized

M anuals

599

Form Description

2009-2011 Acura TL Service Manual

2009-2011 Acura TL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2009 Model Series Acura TL Body Repair Manual

2011 Acura TL Owners Manual

2011 Acura TL Navigation Manual

2011 Acura TL Maintenance Journal

2011 Acura TL Advanced Technology Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61TK402

61TK402EL

61TK430

31TK4620

31TK4820

31TK4M20

31TK4Q20

ACU-R

www.helminc.com

10/07/29 12:58:39 31TK4620_604

2011 TL

CONTINUED

................................AAC . 261, 301, 348 ....................................Accessories . 453

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key .....................................Position) . 145

ACCESSORY Mode ...........................(Power Mode) . 178

............Accessory Power Sockets . 207 ................Active Head Restraints . 159

....................................AcuraLink . 425 ....................Additives, Engine Oil . 510

...........................Advanced Airbags . 28 ...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24

..........Airbag System Components . 24 ......Air Conditioning System . 216, 217

.........................................Usage . 218 ...............Air Pressure, Tires . 535, 536

......................................Antifreeze . 512 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 66, 482 ...................................Operation . 482

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 373 Anti-theft Steering Column

....................................Lock . 145, 183 ................................Audio System . 225

.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 135

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22 .............Automatic Speed Control . 383 ..............Automatic Transmission . 468

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 580 ...............Checking Fluid Level . 515

..........................Paddle Shifters . 473 .......................................Shifting . 469

Shift Lever Position ...............................Indicators . 468

....................Shift Lock Release . 471 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 372

Battery Charging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 561 ............................Jump Starting . 557

..............................Maintenance . 542 ............................Specifications . 581

..............................Before Driving . 443 ....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20

.........................Beverage Holders . 206 ...................Audio . 269, 359

...............HandsFreeLink . 389, 406 ..................................Booster Seats . 54

Brakes ...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 482

.............Break-in, New Linings . 444 ...........................................Fluid . 519

.......................................Parking . 204 .................System Indicator . 65, 563 ........................Wear Indicators . 481

.............................Braking System . 481 .................Break-in, New Vehicle . 444

Brightness Control, ...............................Instruments . 137

....................................Built-In Key . 195 Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 528 .........Daytime Running Lights . 521

.................................Fog Lights . 526

.................................Headlights . 521 ............................Specifications . 581

............Turn Signal Lights . 524, 528 ......................Bulbs, Halogen . 521, 526

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Index

A

B

IN D

E X

I

10/07/29 12:58:46 31TK4620_606

2011 TL

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii ...................................Dashboard . 3, 62

..............Daytime Running Lights . 136 .................................Dead Battery . 557

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 598 ..............Defogger, Rear Window . 139 ..............Defrosting the Windows . 221

....................................Dimensions . 580 .............Dimming the Headlights . 133

Dipstick ..........Automatic Transmission . 515

..................................Engine Oil . 448 ........................Directional Signals . 133

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 481 .................................Disc Changer . 241

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 251 .....................Disposal of Used Oil . 512

............................Capacities Chart . 580 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

............................Carrying, Cargo . 455 .............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 364 ...................................CD Changer . 241

.......................................CD Player . 295 ........................Certification Label . 578

............................................Chains . 541 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 549

Changing Oil ........................................How to . 510 ......................................When to . 497

...Charging System Indicator . 65, 561 ............Checklist, Before Driving . 460

.....................................Child Safety . 37 ..............................Booster Seats . 54

...................................Child Seats . 45 ..........................................Infants . 42

............................Large Children . 53 .........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 38 .............................Small Children . 43

.........................................Tethers . 51

.....................Warning Labels . 39, 59 .........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38

.......................................Child Seats . 45 .........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ................Childproof Door Locks . 147 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 530

..........Client Service Information . 596 .......Climate Control System . 216, 217

..........................On/Off Button . 219 ..............................................Clock . 374

...................................Clutch Fluid . 520 ..................CO in the Exhaust . 57, 589

....Cold Weather, Starting in . 461, 463 ......................Compact Spare Tire . 548

.........................................Compass . 379 .................Console Compartment . 208 .................Consumer Information . 596

.............Controls, Instruments and . 61 Coolant

........................................Adding . 512 ....................................Checking . 449

.........................Proper Solution . 512 ...................Temperature Gauge . 76

........Water Temp Hot Message . 76

Crankcase Emissions Control ........................................System . 589

................Cruise Control Indicator . 72 ............Cruise Control Operation . 383

...................................Cup Holders . 206 .............Customer Service Office . 596

Index

D

C

II

10/08/03 20:57:13 31TK4620_607

2011 TL

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 220

Doors .....Lock Button, Outer Handle . 170

..........Lockout Prevention . 147, 171 .................Monitor Indicator . 12, 71 ....................Power Door Locks . 146

.Unlock Sensor, Outer Handle . 169 ........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 583

Downshifting, ..............Manual Transmission . 465

....................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 473 ...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 459 ....................................Economy . 450

Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 164

Dual Temperature and Mode .......................................Control . 222

..................Dual and Pollen Filter . 532

..............................Economy, Fuel . 450 Electronic Stability Control

............................(ESC) System . 484 ..................................Emergencies . 547

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 557

...........Brake System Indicator . 563 ................Changing a Flat Tire . 549

.....Charging System Indicator . 561 ..................Checking the Fuses . 565

.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 139 .........If the Engine Wont Start . 554

......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 574 ............................Jump Starting . 557

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 561 ...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 562

Manually Opening Fuel Fill .......................................Door . 564

..................Overheated Engine . 559 .......................................Towing . 572

.........................Emergency Brake . 204 ..............Emergency Engine Start . 464

....................Emergency Flashers . 139 ......................Emergency Towing . 572

..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 150 .......................Emissions Controls . 589 ........................Emissions Testing . 592

Engine ............Adding Engine Coolant . 512

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 76 .........................If It Wont Start . 554

Malfunction Indicator ................................Lamp . 64, 562 .................................Oil Life . 84, 497

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 561

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 509 ...............................Overheating . 559

............................Specifications . 581

....................Speed Limiter . 466, 471 .............Start/Stop Button . 177, 182

..............................Starting . 461, 463 Starting System

.........................Message . 462, 464 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 508

..............................Engine Coolant . 512 ............Engine Start/Stop Button . 177

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 445 .Evaporative Emissions Controls . 589

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

Index

F

E

IN D

E X

III

10/07/29 12:58:55 31TK4620_608

2011 TL

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 450 .........................................Gasoline . 444 ...........................................Gauge . 75

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73 ................Octane Requirement . 444

........................Tank, Refueling . 445 ................Gas Station Procedures . 445

Gauges ...Engine Coolant Temperature . 76

...............................................Fuel . 75 Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 468 ..............Manual Transmission . 465

......................................Glove Box . 208 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.....................................(GVWR) . 457

.......................Halogen Bulbs . 521, 526 ......HandsFreeLink (HFL) . 389, 406

............Hazard Warning Flashers . 139 Hard Disc Drive (HDD),

........................................Playing . 308 .....................................Headlights . 133

........................................Aiming . 521 ............Automatic Lighting Off . 135 ............Automatic Lighting On . 134

.........Daytime Running Lights . 136 ..................High Beam Indicator . 71

.......................Reminder Beeps . 133 ........................Replacing Bulbs . 521

.................................Turning on . 133 ............................Head Restraints . 156 .............................Heated Mirrors . 163

...................................Heater, Seat . 196 ...............High-Low Beam Switch . 133

.............................Hill Start Assist . 486 HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 386 ........Hood, Opening and Closing . 447

...........................................Horn . 4, 130 ...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 520

.........................................Features . 215 ....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 445

Filters .........................Dust and Pollen . 532

...............................................Oil . 510 ...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 139

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 549 .....................................Floor Mats . 531

Fluids ..........Automatic Transmission . 515

..........................................Brake . 519 .........................................Clutch . 520

..............Manual Transmission . 517 ................Windshield Washers . 514

FM Stereo Radio ...................................Reception . 368

.....................................Fog Lights . 137 ........................Four-way Flashers . 139

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 26 ....................................Front Seats . 155 ....................................Adjusting . 155

.....................................Airbags . 9, 26

.......................................Heaters . 196 .................................................Fuel . 444

......................Fill Door and Cap . 446 ...........................................Gauge . 75

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73 ................Octane Requirement . 444

...............................Oxygenated . 444 ........................Tank, Filling the . 445

...............................Fuel Economy . 450 .....................Fuses, Checking the . 565

Index

H

G

IV

10/08/06 13:36:34 31TK4620_609

2011 TL

CONTINUED

.......Keyless Access Remote . 168, 173 Keyless Access Remote System

...............................Main Switch . 189 ................Keyless Access System . 167

..........Keyless Memory Settings . 92 ................................................Keys . 141

........................................Built-In . 195

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 578 Ignition

............................................Keys . 141 .........................................Switch . 145

............Timing Control System . 590 ......................Immobilizer System . 143

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 ...............Indicators/Messages . 64, 88

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 66, 482 Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 65, 563 ................Charging System . 65, 561

.............................Cruise Control . 72 .............................Door Open . 12, 71 ...................................Fog Lights . 71 ...................................High Beam . 71 .................................Hot Coolant . 76

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 65 ..............Keyless Access System . 74

.....................................Lights On . 71 ......................................Low Fuel . 73

................Low Oil Pressure . 64, 561 .........Low Tire Pressure/TPMS . 69

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 562

.................................Seat Belt . 20, 64 .....................Side Airbag Off . 33, 67

.........................................SRS . 32, 67 .................Starting System . 462, 464

...........................Trunk Open . 12, 71 Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 70 ........................................VSA Off . 68

.................................VSA System . 68 ..................Individual Map Lights . 213

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 64 ...............................Infant Restraint . 42

......................................Infant Seats . 42 .........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 535

.................................Inside Mirror . 161 .............................Inspection, Tire . 537

....................Installing a Child Seat . 46 ..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

.............................Using LATCH . 47 ............................Instrument Panel . 63

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 137 ...............................Interior Lights . 211

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 550 .......................................Jack, Tire . 550

................................Jump Starting . 557

.......................Label, Certification . 578 ...............Lane Change, Signaling . 133

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21 ...............................LATCH System . 47

................Lights Control Buttons . 211

TM

Index

L

I

K

J

IN D

E X

V

10/07/29 12:59:05 31TK4620_610

2011 TL

Lights ....................Bulb Replacement . 521

.......................................Indicator . 63 .......................................Parking . 133

..........................Turn Signal . 70, 133 ....................................Load Limits . 456

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 145 LOCK VEHICLE OFF

...........................(Power Mode) . 178 ..............Lockout Prevention . 147, 171

Locks Anti-theft Steering

...........................Column . 145, 183 ........................Childproof Door . 147

............................Fuel Fill Door . 446 ..................................Glove Box . 208

...............................Power Door . 146 .........................................Trunk . 148

......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 160 ........................Low Coolant Level . 449 .........................Low Fuel Indicator . 73

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 561 ................................Lower Anchors . 47

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 580 ...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 455

..................................Maintenance . 495 Main Items and Sub

..............................Items . 502, 506 ........................................Minder . 497

Owners Maintenance ...................................Checks . 505

..........................................Safety . 496 Malfunction Indicator

....................................Lamp . 64, 562 ...................Manual Transmission . 465

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 517 ....................................Map Lights . 213

...........Memory, Driving Position . 164 .........................Meters, Gauges . 63, 75

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 161 ...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 454

.......................................Moonroof . 202 .............Multi-Information Display . 77

...................Neutral Gear Position . 470 ..................New Vehicle Break-in . 444

............Normal Shift Speeds . 466, 477

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i ...............Numbers, Identification . 578

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 444 .........................................Odometer . 81

Oil ........................Change, How to . 510 ......................Change, When to . 497 ......................Checking Engine . 448 ..............Pressure Indicator . 64, 561

Selecting Proper Viscosity ......................................Chart . 510

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 145 .............ON Mode (Power Mode) . 178

Onboard Refueling Vapor ....................................Recovery . 589

...........................Operating Range . 168 ............................Outside Mirrors . 162

.....................Outside Temperature . 84 ....................Overheating, Engine . 559

....Owners Maintenance Checks . 505 .........................Oxygenated Fuels . 444

Index

M

N

O

VI

10/08/06 13:36:39 31TK4620_611

2011 TL

CONTINUED

..............................Paddle Shifters . 473 ............Panel Brightness Control . 137

........................Park Gear Position . 469 ...........................................Parking . 480

...............................Parking Brake . 204 Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 65, 563 ...............................Parking Lights . 133

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 480

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34 .............................PGM-FI System . 590

...................................Pollen Filter . 532 ..................................Power Mode . 178

.................ACCESSORY Mode . 179 ...................................ON Mode . 179

............................START Mode . 181 ..............VEHICLE OFF Mode . 179 ...............Power Socket Locations . 205

............................Power Windows . 198 .........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18 .........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 37 .....................General Guidelines . 37

.......................Protecting Infants . 42 .......Protecting Larger Children . 53

.........Protecting Small Children . 43 Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 51 .............................Using LATCH . 47

..................Protecting Your Discs . 364

...................Radiator Overheating . 559 ...Radio/Disc Sound System . 226, 273

.................Radio Theft Protection . 373 ............................Radio, XM . 235, 287

...................Readiness Codes . 562, 592 ..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 528

........................Rear Seat Armrest . 160 ...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 441

...........................Rearview Mirror . 161 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 139 .............Reclining the Seat Backs . 155

Recommended Shift ................................Speeds . 466, 477 ........................................Refueling . 445

.......................Reminder Indicators . 64 Remote, Keyless Access

................................System . 168, 173 ................Remote Audio Controls . 370

.....................Remote Transmitter . 151 Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 532 ................Engine Oil and Filter . 510

..........................................Fuses . 565 ................................Light Bulbs . 521

........................................Minder . 497 ................................Timing Belt . 520

...........................................Tires . 539 .............................Wiper Blades . 532

Replacing Seat Belts After a ............................................Crash . 23

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 598 Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 449, 512 ......................Reverse Tilt Mirror . 162

...............................Restraint, Child . 37 ..................Reverse Gear Position . 470

................................Rotation, Tire . 539

Index IN

D E

X

P

R

VII

10/07/29 12:59:15 31TK4620_612

2011 TL

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20 ............Safety Defects, Reporting . 598

.................................Safety Features . 7 ...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8 .............Safety Labels, Location of . 58

..............................Safety Messages . iii .....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20

...............Additional Information . 20 Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22 .....................................Cleaning . 530

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21 ................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Indicator and ................................Beeper . 20, 64

...................System Components . 20 ...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

..................................Seat Heaters . 196 ......................Seats, Adjusting the . 155

............................Security System . 377 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45

...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 226 ..................Sequential Shift Mode . 475

...............................Serial Number . 578 ..............................Service Minder . 497

...........................Service Manual . 599 .........Service Station Procedures . 445

..........................Setting the Clock . 374 ........................SH-AWD Indicator . 73

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 468 ........................Shift Lock Release . 471

................................Side Airbags . 9, 30 ........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 33, 67

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32 .............................Signaling Turns . 133

.....................................Snow Tires . 541 ................................Sound System . 225

Spare Tire ......................................Inflating . 548

....................Specifications . 548, 582 ....................................Spark Plugs . 581

................................Specifications . 580

................................Speed Control . 383 ...................................Speedometer . 75

..........SRS, Additional Information . 24 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

.............................Airbag Service . 35 ......Airbag System Components . 24

How the Passenger Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 33

How the SRS Indicator .......................................Works . 32

How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32 .............................SRS Indicator . 32, 67

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 145 ......START Mode (Power Mode) . 178

...Start/Stop Button, Engine . 177, 182 ..............Starting the Engine . 461, 463

....Check Starting System . 462, 464 In Cold Weather at High

..........................Altitude . 461, 463 ................With a Dead Battery . 557

........Steam Coming from Engine . 559 Steering Wheel

..............................Adjustments . 140 ...Anti-theft Column Lock . 145, 183

Steering Wheel ..............Buttons . 370, 383, 389, 406

Index

S

VIII

10/07/29 12:59:19 31TK4620_613

2011 TL

CONTINUED

...................Stereo Sound System . 225 ....................Storing Your Vehicle . 544

......................................Sun Visors . 209 ........................Sunglasses Holder . 210

Super Handling All-Wheel ...Drive (TM) (SH-AWD ) . 73, 478

....Supplemental Restraint System . 24 ......................................Servicing . 35

...............................SRS Indicator . 32 ...................System Components . 24

..................................Synthetic Oil . 510

.....................................Tachometer . 75 .Taking Care of the Unexpected . 547

Technical Descriptions ....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 583 .....Emissions Control Systems . 589

Three Way Catalytic .......................Converter . 590, 591

.......................Temperature Gauge . 76 ....................Temperature, Outside . 84

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 224 ..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

................Theft Protection, Radio . 373

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 591 .........Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 447

................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 140 ..........................Time, Setting the . 374

....................................Tire Chains . 541 .........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 549

...........................Tire Information . 583 .................................Tire Labeling . 585

Tire Pressure Monitoring ....................System (TPMS) . 488

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ...........................Indicator . 69, 488

......................Pressure Monitor . 489 Required Federal

............................Explanation . 587 ..............TPMS System Failure . 491

...............................................Tires . 534 ......................Air Pressure . 535, 536

........................................Chains . 541 .........................Checking Wear . 537 ..........................Compact Spare . 548

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 583 .Glossary of Tire Terminology . 586

......................................Inflation . 535 ..................................Inspection . 537 ...................................Replacing . 539

......................................Rotating . 539 ................................Service Life . 538

...........................................Snow . 541 ....................Specifications . 540, 582 .............................Summer Tire . 540

.......................Traction Devices . 541 ..........................Winter Driving . 540

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 550 Torque Distribution Monitor

...............................(SH-AWD ) . 478 Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 493 ................Emergency Wrecker . 572

...........................................Hook . 574 ...........................Traction Devices . 541

Transmission Checking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 515 Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 517 ..................Fluid Selection . 516, 517

..............Identification Number . 579 .............Shifting the Automatic . 469

..................Shifting the Manual . 465

Index IN

D E

X

T

IX

10/07/29 12:59:24 31TK4620_614

2011 TL

.............................XM Radio . 235, 287

.....................................Treadwear . 583 ................................Trip Computer . 82

.......................................Trip Meter . 81 ..............................................Trunk . 148

..................Emergency Opener . 150 ...............................Opening the . 148

............................Open Indicator . 71 .............Open Monitor Indicator . 12

..................................Turn Signals . 133

Unexpected, Taking Care ..........................................of the . 547

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 583 ........................Unleaded Gasoline . 444

USB Adapter ..................Cable . 254, 263, 340, 350

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 512

................................Vanity Mirror . 209 .................Vehicle Capacity Load . 456

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 580

VEHICLE OFF Mode ...........................(Power Mode) . 178

....Vehicle Identification Number . 578 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability ....Control (ESC), System . 484

...............VSA Off Indicator . 68, 484 .......................VSA OFF Switch . 485

........VSA System Indicator . 68, 484 .............................Vehicle Storage . 544

.................................................VIN . 578 ..................................Viscosity, Oil . 510

...........Voice Control System . 218, 273

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii .........Warning Labels, Location of . 58

....................Warranty Coverages . 597 Washer, Windshield

................Fluid Level Message . 514 ...................................Operation . 131

............................Reserve Tank . 514 Wheels

.............Adjusting the Steering . 140 ............Alignment and Balance . 538

..........................Compact Spare . 548 ..............................Wrench, Nut . 550

Windows .............................Auto Reverse . 199

................Operating the Power . 198 .........................Rear, Defogger . 139

Windshield .....................................Cleaning . 131 ...................................Defroster . 221

.....................................Washers . 131 Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 532 ...................................Operation . 131 ....................................Worn Tires . 537

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 572

: U.S.

Index

U

V

W

X

X

10/07/29 12:59:29 31TK4620_615

2011 TL

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Spare Tire Pressure:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Brake Fluid:

Manual Transmission Fluid: 4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (including filter):

Capacity:

Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher required (see Fuel Recommendations on page ).

18.5 US gal (70 )

API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page ).

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Rear: 37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm ) Front:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Front/Rear:

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ).

Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) (see page ).

Use Acura All-Wheel Drive Fluid (DPSF) only.

SH-AWD differential case 2.67 US qt (2.53 )

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only.

Acura Manual Transmission Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary replacement (see page ).

Capacity: 2.2 US qt (2.1 )

444

509

516

519

All models except SH-AWD with High Performance Tires and SH-AWD TECH HPT models

SH-AWD with High Performance Tires, SH-AWD TECH HPT, and Canadian A-Spec models

518

On models with SH-AWD

10/08/03 20:57:32 31TK4620_617

2011 TL

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owners Manual covers all models of the Acura TL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owners Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin dun Manuel du Conducteur en franais, veuillez demander votre concessionnaire de commander le numro de pice 33TK4C20.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the TL Acura works, you can view and download the Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Acura TL as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura TL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura TL 2011 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.